2009 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, refer
to the DURAMAX® Diesel supplement for additional
and specific information on this engine.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Owners
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
names SILVERADO and Z71 are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
Canadian Owners
(Propriétaires Canadiens)
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15911382 B Second Printing
©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do
this,” or “Do not let this
happen.”
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
{ CAUTION:
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
+ : Fuses
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
} : Power
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gage
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1
Seats and Restraint System
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-80
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted
up and down.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Power Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control,
Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Manual Lumbar
Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your
vehicle’s power seat:
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is
located behind the power seat control on the outboard
side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
On vehicles with this feature the control is located on
the outboard side of the seat.
A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings
to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the
knob forward or rearward.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have additional features to adjust your
vehicle’s power seat:
Power Lumbar
• To raise the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
information.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
On seats with power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard side
of the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are
located on the driver and passenger doors.
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this feature
are located on the driver’s
door panel, and are used to
program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s
seat, outside mirrors, and
the adjustable throttle and
brake pedal.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
heated seat and seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the
temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to turn
the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will show the level
of heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and one
for low.
The heated seats will be canceled 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated seat feature
after restarting the vehicle, press the heated seat
or seatback button again.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save seating positions in memory:
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is on,
automatic seat, adjustable mirror, and adjustable pedal
movements will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL”
on page 3-76 for more information.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable
position.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-26
for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory function at
any time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal switch.
Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake
pedals, or power lumbar will have the ability to
save and recall their positions.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position,
the driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may
stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction
and press the appropriate control for the area that is not
responding for two seconds. Try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling,
see your dealer for service.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to
indicate that the position has been stored.
A second seating, lumbar, mirror, and throttle and brake
pedal position can be programmed by repeating the
above steps and pressing button 2.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat,
outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake pedals
will move to the position previously stored. You will hear a
single beep.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Exit Seat
Reclining Seatbacks
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
{ CAUTION:
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit
position can be recalled by pressing the exit button.
You will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat
will move back.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat
movement will occur when the key is removed from
the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
more information.
The memory seat and easy exit features can also be
programmed using the DIC.
{ CAUTION:
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when
you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seat(s).
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Seatback Latches
The front seatbacks tilt forward to allow access to the
rear of the cab.
To tilt the seatback forward, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the
seatback to its upright position, push and pull on
the seatback to make sure it is locked.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
Center Seat
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
Your vehicle may have a front center seat.
The seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/
storage area for the driver and passenger when the
center seat is not used. Do not use it as a seating
position when the seatback is folded down.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Pull the seat cushion up until it latches with the
seatback.
Rear Seats
3. After latching the seat cushion up, pull forward on it
to make sure it is locked.
Rear Seat Operation
(Extended Cab Full Bench)
To fold the seat down, do the following:
1. Push the seat cushion rearward while pulling the
release strap, located under the seat cushion.
Pull the seat cushion down until it latches.
Folding the Rear Seat
To fold the seat up, do the following:
2. After latching the seat cushion, pull up on it to
make sure it is locked.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1. Pull up on the front of
the seat cushion while
pulling down on the
release strap, located
under the seat cushion.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seat to the normal seating position, slowly
pull the seat cushion down.
Rear Seat Operation (All Split
Bench and Hybrid Full Bench)
Folding Rear Seat
{ CAUTION:
On a vehicle with a second row 60/40 split seat
either side of the rear seat may be folded for added
cargo space.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Make sure that nothing is on the seat.
To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat cushion up.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
People riding on the tailgate (if equipped) can
easily lose their balance and fall even when the
vehicle is operated at low speeds. Falling from a
moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or
death.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt
cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or
your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts,
the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
{ CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or
killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and
you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your
belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
If your vehicle is a regular cab, then all seating positions
in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If your vehicle is
a crew or extended cab, then all seating positions in the
vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the center
front passenger position (if equipped), which has a
page 1-36 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle,
when using the lap-shoulder belt in a rear center
seating position of a crew-cab, tilt the latch plate and
keep pulling the safety belt until it can be buckled.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the
belt across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,
check if the correct buckle is being used.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the
safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later
in this section.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move the adjuster
down for the regular and
crew cabs, squeeze the
buttons (A) on the sides
of the height adjuster and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and
the vehicle.
Regular and Crew Cab
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the extended cab,
push down on the release
button (A) and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,
near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle has
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
Extended Cab
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try
to move it down, without squeezing the buttons for the
regular and crew cabs, or without pushing the release
button for extended cabs, to make sure it has locked
into position.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the shoulder belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the
interior body.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide onto the
storage clip.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt (Crew and Extended Cab)
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to
page 1-30.
Your vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-37.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety
belt quickly if necessary.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
page 1-30 for more information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the
harness.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward position.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system or airbag
switch has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
{ CAUTION:
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and also
the instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to be
attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
Regular Cab —
Three-Passenger
Front Seat
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Do not install a child restraint in the center front seat
position. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Regular Cab —
Two-Passenger
Front Seat
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Crew and Extended Cab
Rear Seat
For crew and extended cab models, the rear outboard
seating positions have exposed metal lower anchors
located in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
Regular Cab
For regular cab models,
there is an anchor symbol
on the covers to assist
you in locating the
Do not install a child restraint in the center seat position.
top tether anchors.
For regular cab models, the top tether anchors are
located under covers on the back panel behind the
passenger seat. Remove the trim plug to access the
anchor. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will be used to route the top tether through, as well as,
to secure the top tether in the vehicle. Be sure to use
an anchor (loop) located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will be
placed.
Be sure to read the instructions following to properly
install a child restraint using these loops.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-48 for additional information.
Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab Similar
For crew and extended cab models, the top tether
anchors are the loops located near the top of the
seatback for each rear seating position. These loops
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
CAUTION: (Continued)
more than one child restraint to a single anchor
could cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A child or
others could be injured. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach
only one child restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder
belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor, except for the center top tether
anchors in the crew and extended cabs. Attaching
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
1.4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to
its stowed position, before folding the seat.
Regular Cab Models
1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor, if your vehicle has
one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
If the position you are
1.1. Pull the passenger seatback forward
by pulling the recliner handle upward to
access the top tether anchor. See Reclining
information.
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a single
tether, raise the headrest or
head restraint and route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
1.2. Find the top tether anchor.
1.3. Remove the cover to expose the anchor.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) on page 1-62
the child restraint using the safety belts.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether anchor (loop), if
your vehicle has one. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Crew and Extended Cab Models
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
Example — Rear Driver’s Side Position
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2. When using a child restraint with a top tether
in the rear center position:
A. Route the top tether (B) through the
center loop (D), and behind the inboard
passenger side headrest or head
restraint post.
B. Attach the top tether (B) to the top
tether anchor (loop) at the rear
passenger side seating position.
2.3. When using a child restraint with a top tether
in the rear passenger position:
A. Raise the headrest or head restraint.
B. Route the top tether (B) between
the headrest or head restraint posts,
through the loop on the passenger
side and behind the inboard headrest
or head restraint post.
Example — Rear Driver’s Side Position
2.1. When using a child restraint with a top tether
in the rear driver side position:
C. Attach the top tether (B) to the top
tether anchor (loop) (D) at the center
rear seating position.
A. Raise the headrest or head restraint.
B. Route the top tether (B) between
the headrest or head restraint posts,
through the loop (A), behind the inboard
headrest or head restraint post, and
under the center shoulder belt (C).
2.4. Tighten the top tether when and as the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions say.
When the top tether is tightened, the anchor
(loop) may bend. This is normal and will
not damage the vehicle.
C. Attach the top tether (B) to the top
tether anchor (loop) (D) at the center
rear seating position.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
tether anchor locations.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For crew cab second row seatings positions, tilt the
latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49
for more information.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
{ CAUTION:
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position
(With Airbag Off Switch)
CAUTION: (Continued)
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward position.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Even if the airbag switch has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, no system
is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
There may be a switch in the glove box that you can
use to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag.
including important safety information.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the
vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If you have no other choice but to install a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child restraint has been
installed.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
When the airbag off switch has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in the
airbag off light should light and stay lit when you start
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
locations.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
If you turned the airbag off with the switch, turn on the
right front passenger airbag when you remove the child
restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be
sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position
(With Passenger Sensing System)
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-40
for more information on this, including important
safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
additional information.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49
for how and where to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
locations.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-40.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-84 for more information.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position
(Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only)
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-49
for how and where to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
locations.
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat. Here is why:
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
information.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the person seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{ CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating
airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and do not
attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub
or on or near any other airbag covering.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
1-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
In addition, the vehicle may have dual-stage frontal
airbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
Vehicles with dual stage airbags also have seat position
sensors which enable the sensing system to monitor the
position of the driver seat (all models) and the right front
passenger seat (light-duty regular cab and light-duty
extended cab models only). The seat position sensor
provides information that is used to determine if the
airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
The vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of your
vehicle is 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) or above, your vehicle
has single stage airbags. If the GVWR is below 8,500 lb
(3 855 kg) then your vehicle has dual stage airbags.
You can find the GVWR on the certification label on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-32 for more information.
1-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly
the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags, deployment
is determined by the location and severity of the side
impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment
is determined by the direction of the roll.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
page 1-77 for more information.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot
for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
1-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
Airbag Off Switch
If one of the switches pictured in the following
illustrations is located in the glove box, the vehicle has
an airbag on-off switch that you can use to manually
turn on or off the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for
the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
United States
Canada
If the vehicle does not have an airbag off switch, it may
have a passenger sensing system. See Passenger
1-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This switch should only be turned to the off position
if the person in the right front passenger position
is a member of a passenger risk group identified
by the national government as follows:
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
• Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
for the passenger; and
• Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag
in a crash greater than the potential harm from
turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger,
even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield
in a crash.
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• My vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• The infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
{ CAUTION:
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and help
protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off the
passenger’s airbag unless the person sitting there
is in a risk group.
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space
is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
• The child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the
vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
United States
Canada
To turn off the right front passenger airbag, insert the
ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch
to the off position.
The word OFF or the off symbol will come on in the
passenger airbag status indicator located in the overhead
console to let you know that the right front passenger
airbag is off, after the system check is completed.
The airbag off light will come on and stay on to let
you know that the right front passenger’s airbag is off.
1-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Sensing System
If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the
following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger position,
unless there is an airbag off switch located in the glove
box. If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does
not have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
United States
Canada
To turn the right front passenger airbag on again, insert
the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move
the switch to the on position.
The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled
more information.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON
or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
1-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and the roof-rail airbags (if equipped)
are not affected by the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat and safety belt.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front
passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight and size.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
1-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is present in a
child restraint.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
1-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-3.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position With Passenger Sensing System in
the Index.
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn
off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending
upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your
specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat.
If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
1-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
In addition, your vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger’s
position, which includes sensors that are part
of the passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly if the original
seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery
or trim designed for a different vehicle.
1-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under
or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with
the operation of the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper deployment of
the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: We have designed our airbag systems to work
properly under a wide range of conditions, including
snow plowing with vehicles that have the optional
Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO VYU). But do
not change or defeat the snow plow’s “tripping
mechanism.” If you do, it can damage your snow
plow and your vehicle, and it may cause an airbag
inflation.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-86
for additional important information.
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-37 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder
light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you
in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new
LATCH system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if
the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped),
was not being used at the time of the crash.
{ CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt
assemblies inspected or replaced.
1-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Park Tilt Mirrors ............................................2-60
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key is used for the ignition and all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this:
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy
weather.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing Q arms the content theft-deterrent system. See
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door.
If K is pressed again within three seconds, all
remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come
on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition
is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn signal lamps flash
twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC
If enabled through the DIC, the exterior lights may
turn on. See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under DIC
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the
content theft-deterrent system. See Content
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has
occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-76
for additional information.
ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must be
in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter
is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight
transmitters programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle.
To replace the battery:
Battery Replacement
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
information.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the
vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or
air conditioning systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will return after the key
is turned to the ON/RUN position.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system,
the climate control system will default to a heating or
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle
was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated seats, the heated
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and
will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, you will need to manually
turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
on page 1-8 for additional information.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Immediately press and
hold the transmitter’s remote start button until the
turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the
vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote start
button for two to four seconds. Pressing the remote
start button again after the vehicle has started
will turn the engine off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key. After the key is removed from
the ignition, the vehicle can be remote started again.
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the
ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an
emission control system malfunction and the check
engine light comes on.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil
pressure gets low.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle
start system enabled. The system may be enabled or
disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under
page 3-76 for additional information. If your vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to
enable or disable the remote vehicle start system.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
between driving sequences. The engine will run for
10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
Remote Start Ready
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
The additional ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the driver’s door.
Door Locks
From the inside, use the power door locks or manual
door locks. To lock or unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
{ CAUTION:
Power Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should be
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the front doors.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
The vehicle may have the delayed locking feature.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a door
is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last
door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that
the delayed locking feature is in use.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Rear Door Security Locks
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
page 3-76.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
programming.
The rear doors must be open to access them. The label
showing lock and unlock positions is located near
the lock.
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Rear Doors
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock,
using the power door lock switch, or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle
has one.
Extended Cab
Your vehicle may have a rear access door(s) that allows
easier access to the rear area of the extended cab.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To open a rear access door
from the outside, first open
the front door. Then, use
the handle located on the
front edge of the rear
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
access door to open it.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door
is open.
If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed
when the driver’s door is open and the key is in
the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s
door will unlock.
You must fully close a rear access door before you can
close the front door.
If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is
pressed when the front passenger’s door is open and
the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open a rear access door
from the inside, the front
door must be opened first.
Then, use the handle
located on the inside of the
rear access door to open.
Tailgate
{ CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate,
even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds.
People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their
balance and fall in response to vehicle maneuvers.
Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious
injuries or death. Do not allow people to ride on
the tailgate. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Crew Cabs
If your vehicle is a crew cab, you can open your doors
from the inside or outside. Your vehicle may also
have a feature which prevents children from opening the
for more information.
On vehicles with a lock on the tailgate, use the key to
lock or unlock the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling
the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it
latches.
After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back towards
you to be sure it latches securely.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. With the tailgate about halfway open, lift the right
edge of the tailgate from the lower pivot.
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate can be removed to allow for different
loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed
without assistance, you may want someone to assist
you with the removal to avoid possible damage to
the vehicle.
On vehicles with the tailgate assist feature, raise
the tailgate nearly all the way to the closed position
prior to removing the left edge.
3. Move the tailgate to the right to release the
left edge.
On vehicles with a rear vision camera, it must be
disconnected before removing the tailgate. See Rear
information.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall the tailgate. Make
sure the tailgate is secure.
To remove the tailgate, do the following:
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly and release
both retaining cable
clips. To release the
retaining cable clips, lift
the cable so it points
straight out. Lift the clip
over the bolt, and push
the cable forward then
rotate down.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or
lower the manual windows.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do
not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Crew Cab shown
If your vehicle has power windows, the controls are
located on each of the side doors in the front and rear
for crew cab and extended cab models.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger’s and
rear windows as well. Your power windows will work
when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or
RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
page 2-23.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Press the switch down to lower the window, and pull up
the front of the switch to raise the window.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Down Windows
Power Sliding Rear Window
Vehicles with the express down feature allow the driver
and front passenger windows to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press down fully on the window
switch, then release, to activate the express down mode.
The express down mode can be canceled at any time by
pulling up on the switch. To open the window partway,
press the switch to the first depression position, until the
window is at the desired position.
On vehicles with a power
sliding rear window, the
switch is located in
the overhead console.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): If your crew cab or extended
cab vehicle has power windows, the driver’s door power
window switch has a lockout feature. The lockout
switch is located in front of the window switches. This
feature prevents the rear windows from operating,
except from the driver’s position. Press the switch to
engage or disengage the lockout feature. An indicator
light on the switch will come on when the lockout feature
is engaged, and will go off when disengaged.
The power sliding rear window works when the ignition
has been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
more information.
The power sliding rear window cannot be operated
manually.
T : Push to open the window.
S : Pull to close the window.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Swing the sun
visor to the side to cover the side window.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The security light should come on and
flash.
The passenger’s side sun visor may have a vanity
mirror.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm
will not be activated until all doors are closed
and the security light goes off.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
3. Close all doors. The security light will stop flashing
and go off after approximately 30 seconds. The
content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the
security light goes off.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If a locked door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn
will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not
placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door
is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash
and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds, then
will turn off to save the battery power.
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
This is the security light.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the power door
lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You should also remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been
set off.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
RKE transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm
if the system has been armed.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and
turn it to START to turn it off.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, see your dealer/retailer for service.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
must be applied.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF.
capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If
this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is
all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the
key cannot be turned by hand, see your
dealer/retailer.
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while
the engine is off. Use this position if the vehicle must be
pushed or towed.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The
switch stays in this position when the engine is running.
The transmission is also unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Starting the Engine
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
• Audio System
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
• Power Windows
• OnStar® System (if equipped)
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
• Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to 15 seconds. Wait at least
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let
go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This
clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To control the fast idle:
Fast Idle System
• To Enable the Fast idle, press and release the
Cruise Control On/Off button and ensure that
the LED is lit.
Fast Idle System with Switch
If the vehicle has this
• For the preset Fast Idle, press and release the
cruise set switch. This will set the preset fast
idle speed.
feature it is available only
with cruise control. The
manual fast idle switch is
operated using the
cruise control buttons
located on the left hand
side of the steering wheel.
• For the variable fast idle, press and hold the
accelerator at the desired RPM, then press
and release the cruise control cruise set switch to
set the desired idle speed.
When the fast idle is active the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display “FAST IDLE ON.”
One of the following actions will turn off the fast idle:
• Pressing the brake.
This system can be used to increase engine idle speed
whenever the following conditions are met:
• Selecting the Cancel button.
• The park brake is set.
• Releasing the Parking Brake.
• The brake pedal is not pressed.
• The transmission shifter is moved out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral).
• The vehicle must not be moving and the accelerator
must not be pressed.
• Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it
was previously on.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
On vehicles with this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
The vehicle may have a memory function which lets
pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat,
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the
vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise
control.
Engine Coolant Heater
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate control system.
The engine heater can provide easier starting and better
fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold weather
conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles with an
engine heater should be plugged in at least four hours
before starting. An internal thermostat in the plug-end of
the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant
heater operation at temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of
the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
Active Fuel Management™
Vehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on the driving conditions.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better
fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, or
merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
{ CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
If your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™
indicator, see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
on using this display.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission have an
electronic shift position indicator within the instrument
panel cluster. This display comes on when the ignition
key is turned to the ON/RUN position.
Heavy Duty 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
Shown (Light Duty 6 Speed Similar)
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a
hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you
might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
information.
Hydra-Matic4-Speed
Automatic Transmission
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the vehicle will
be free to roll — even if the shift lever is in
P (Park) — if the transfer case is in Neutral. So,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear,
Two-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive High
or Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in Neutral. See
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
on page 4-30.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
{ CAUTION:
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next gear
and has more power.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road
driving. You might want to shift the transmission to a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding. See Skidding under
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts
the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions
in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift
stabilization feature is designed to determine, before
making an upshift, if the engine is able to maintain vehicle
speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttle
position, and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization feature
determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be
maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead
holds the current gear. In some cases, this could appear
to be a delayed shift, however the transmission is
operating normally.
M (Manual Mode): This position is available on
vehicles with the Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic®
6-Speed transmission. It lets drivers select the range
of gears appropriate for current driving conditions. If the
vehicle has this feature, see Range Select Mode
(Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
transmission) later in this section.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
It reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without
using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third) instead of
D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
The transmission uses adaptive shift controls.
Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift
parameters to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the
transmissions computer. The transmission constantly
makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance
according to how the vehicle is being used, such as with
a heavy load or when temperature changes. During this
adaptive shift control process, shifting might feel different
as the transmission determines the best settings.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You
can use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but
then you would also want to use the brakes off and on.
If you manually select 2 (Second) in an automatic
transmission, the transmission will start in second gear.
You can use this feature for reducing the speed of
the rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
When temperatures are very cold, the Allison
Transmission® and Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission’s
gear shifting could be delayed providing more stable
shifts until the engine warms up. Shifts could be more
noticeable with a cold transmission. This difference in
shifting is normal.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed transmission
this position reduces vehicle speed even more than
2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission does not shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Range Selection Mode (Allison® or
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Transmission)
For an Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
transmission, this position reduces vehicle speed
without using the brakes. You can use it for major/severe
downgrades and off-road driving where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
When you shift to 1 (First) it provides the lowest gear
appropriate to current road speed and continues to
downshift as the vehicle slows, eventually downshifting to
1 (First) gear.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode. The
Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle’s
transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill
or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of
gears.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use this feature, do the following:
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the
steering column shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for current driving conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays
next to the M, indicating the current gear.
Low Traction Mode
If your vehicle has the Allison Transmission®, or the
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, it
has a Low Traction Mode that can assist in vehicle
acceleration when road conditions are slippery, such as
with ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a stop, select
the second gear range using Range Selection Mode.
This will limit torque to the wheels after it detects wheel
slip, preventing the tires from spinning.
This number is the highest gear that can be used.
However, the vehicle can automatically shift to lower
gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means that
all gears below that number are available. When
5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth)
cannot be used until the plus/minus button located on
the steering column lever is used to change to the gear.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and
the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 4-50 for more information.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul Mode (Allison Transmission®
or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission)
Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a tow/haul
mode. The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission shift
pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing increased
performance, vehicle control, and transmission cooling
when towing or hauling heavy loads.
Vehicles with an Allison or Hydra-Matic® 6-speed
automatic transmission® have a tow/haul mode. The
tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to
reduce shift cycling, providing increased performance,
vehicle control, and transmission cooling when towing or
hauling heavy loads.
The selector button is located on the end of the shift
lever. Turn the tow/haul on and off by pressing the
button. When the tow/haul is on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on.
information.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the tow/haul mode on and off by pressing the
button, located on the end of the shift lever. When the
tow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on.
vehicle. Grade Braking monitors vehicle speed,
acceleration, engine torque and brake pedal usage.
Using this information, it detects when the truck is on a
downhill grade and the driver desires to slow the
vehicle by pressing the brake.
information.
information.
page 4-50 for more information.
Cruise Grade Braking (Allison
Transmission® or Hydra-Matic®
6-Speed Automatic Transmission)
Grade Braking (Allison Transmission®
or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission)
Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill
grade. It maintains vehicle speed by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and
the transmission to slow the vehicle. Cruise Grade
Braking operates while Cruise Control is engaged in
Tow/Haul mode to assist in maintaining vehicle speed
under loaded vehicle conditions. It utilizes vehicle
acceleration and deviation from desired speed to
determine the correct gear for the operating condition.
If vehicle speed is above the desired speed the
transmission will downshift to slow the vehicle. If vehicle
speed is near or below desired speed the trans will
upshift, allowing vehicle speed to increase.
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by
pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever.
While in Range Selection Mode, Grade Braking is
deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range
of gears.
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode
is selected and you are not in the Range Selection
Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode listed previously and
more information on the Range Selection Mode. Grade
Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds
when driving on downhill grades by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that utilizes the engine
and transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear
on the braking system and increases control of the
While in the Range Select Mode (RSM) mode, cruise
grade braking is not available.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Transfer Case
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, you can send the
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of Four-Wheel
Drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
the following before using Four-Wheel Drive. See the
appropriate text for the transfer case in the vehicle.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight
turns, you may experience vibration in the steering
system.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, shifting into
The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right
of the driver. Use this lever to shift into and out of
Four-Wheel Drive.
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
Front Axle
The front axle engages and disengages automatically
when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for
the axle to engage or disengage is normal.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Four-Wheel Drive
indicator light comes on
when you shift into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
See Four-Wheel-Drive
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of time can
cause premature wear on the vehicle’s powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel
Drive for extended periods of time.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also
engages the front axle and delivers extra torque. You
may never need Four-Wheel-Drive Low. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are driving off-road in deep
sand, deep mud, deep snow, and while climbing or
descending steep hills.
Some delay between shifting and when the indicator
light comes on is normal.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, shifting into
Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
N
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
2 m
4 m
4 n
Normal
Severe
YES
YES
Extreme
YES
Vehicle in Tow*
YES
Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-45
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A parking brake symbol is
located next to the
N (Neutral) symbol as a
reminder to set the parking
brake before shifting the
transfer case into
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting only when the vehicle
needs to be towed. See Recreational Vehicle Towing
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The
front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting
also provides the best fuel economy.
N (Neutral).
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use this setting when
you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads
or in most off-road situations. This setting also
engages the front axle to help drive your vehicle. This is
the best setting to use when plowing snow.
{ CAUTION:
You can shift from Two-Wheel-Drive High to
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive High to
Two-Wheel-Drive High while the vehicle is moving. In
extremely cold weather, it may be necessary to stop or
slow the vehicle to shift into Four-Wheel-Drive High.
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in Neutral. See Parking
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Using the Manual Transfer Case
Shifting from Two-Wheel-Drive High to
Four-Wheel-Drive High
• Shifting should be made using quick motions.
Shifting slowly may make it more difficult to shift.
• Shifts between Two-Wheel-Drive High and
Four-Wheel-Drive High can be made at any
vehicle speed.
• You may notice that it is harder to shift when the
vehicle is cold. After the vehicle warms up the
shifting will return to normal.
• Shift the transfer case lever in one continuous
motion into either the Four-Wheel-Drive High
or Two-Wheel-Drive High position.
• While in Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low
you may experience reduced fuel economy.
• In extremely cold weather, it may be necessary
to slow or stop the vehicle to shift into
Four-Wheel-Drive High until the vehicle has
warmed up.
• Avoid driving in Four-Wheel Drive on clean, dry
pavement. It may cause your tires to wear faster,
make the transfer case harder to shift, and run
noisier.
• While in Four-Wheel-Drive High, the vehicle
can be driven at any posted legal speed limit.
• If the transfer case shifter is in the N (Neutral)
position and you have difficulty reaching the
selected transfer case mode, with the engine
running, shift the transmission momentarily to drive
and then back to N (Neutral). This will realign
the gear teeth in the transfer case and allow you to
complete the shift.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
• Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low with the vehicle
at a stop may be more difficult. You may be unable
to complete the shift to Four-Wheel-Drive Low,
and the transfer case will end up in N (Neutral). This
is normal, and is a function of the gear teeth
aligning in the transfer case. When this happens,
make sure the engine is on, shift the transmission
momentarily to D (Drive) and back to N (Neutral),
and then complete the transfer case shift.
Notice: Shifting the transfer case into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low while moving at speeds
faster than 3 mph (5 km/h) may cause premature
wear to the transfer case, and may cause the gears
to grind. To avoid causing premature wear, and
grinding the gears, do not shift the transfer case into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low while the vehicle is moving
faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
• Shift the transfer case shift lever in one continuous
motion into the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position.
Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low should be done, if
possible, with the vehicle at a slight roll, 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
• When Four-Wheel-Drive Low do not drive faster
than 45 mph. This will reduce wear and extend
the life of your transfer case.
• Shift the transmission into N (Neutral).
Shifting In or Out of Neutral
{ CAUTION:
1. With the vehicle running and the engine at an idle
set the parking brake.
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in Neutral. See Parking
2. Place the transmission into N (Neutral).
Shift the transfer case in one continuous motion into or
out of the N (Neutral) position.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can choose among four driving settings:
Electronic Transfer Case
Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in.
The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn
on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do
not come on, you should take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service. An indicator light flashes while
shifting the transfer case and remains illuminated
when the shift is complete. If for some reason the
transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it will return
to the last chosen setting.
The transfer case knob is
located next to the
steering column.
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The
front axle is not engaged in Two-Wheel Drive. This
setting also provides the best fuel economy.
Use the dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
N
2 m
YES
4 m
4 n
Normal
Severe
YES
Extreme
YES
Vehicle in Tow*
YES
Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-45
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use the
Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra traction is
needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also engages the front
axle to help drive the vehicle. This is the best setting to
use when plowing snow.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause
the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also engages
the front axle and delivers extra torque. You may
never need this setting. It sends maximum power to all
four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive
Low while driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep
snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle. See
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, shifting into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
If the SERVICE 4–Wheel Drive message stays on, you
should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for
service. See “Service 4–Wheel Drive message” under
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To
help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive High position.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting
from Four-Wheel-Drive Low. See Shifting Out of
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for more information.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High
ranges or from transfer case N (Neutral) with the engine
running.
When Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehicle speed
should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed
operation in Four-Wheel-Drive Low may damage
or shorten the life of the drivetrain.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low
position when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the vehicle
is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission
is in N (Neutral). After 30 seconds the transfer case
will shift to Four-Wheel-Drive High mode.
To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method
for shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have
the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn
the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator
light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting
the transmission in gear.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive High, or
Two-Wheel-Drive High switch position when the vehicle
is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
or Two-Wheel-Drive High indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless
your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
transmission is in N (Neutral).
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low to Four-Wheel-Drive
High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High, the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition in
ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of
Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the
Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High
position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
or Two-Wheel-Drive High indicator light to stop
flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission
into gear.
Shifting into Neutral
To shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll.
2. Set the parking brake and press and hold the
page 2-50 for more information.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the mode
indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
4. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel-Drive High.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral)
until it stops and hold it there until the Neutral light
starts blinking. This will take at least 10 seconds.
Then slowly release the dial to the four low position.
The N (Neutral) light will come on when the
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High
ranges or from transfer case N (Neutral) with the engine
running.
transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer case
is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to
R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the
transmission to D (Drive) for one second.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the mode
indicator lights to stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park).
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the
shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer case
from possible damage and will only allow the transfer
case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds. The transfer
case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Out of Neutral
To shift the transfer case out of N (Neutral) do the
following:
Automatic Transfer Case
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
The transfer case knob is
located next to the
steering column.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off,
and shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
3. Turn the transfer case dial to Two-Wheel-Drive High.
After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral),
the N (Neutral) light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the dial to shift into and out of Four-Wheel Drive.
You can choose among five driving settings:
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use the
Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra traction is
needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also engages the front
axle to help drive the vehicle. This is the best setting to
use when plowing snow.
Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in.
The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn
on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do
not come on, you should take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service. An indicator light will flash
while shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated
when the shift is complete. If for some reason the
transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it will return
to the last chosen setting.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also
engages the front axle and delivers extra torque. You
may never need this setting. It sends maximum power to
all four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low
if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep
snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The
front axle is not engaged in Two-Wheel Drive. This
setting also provides the best fuel economy.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, shifting into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions
are variable. When driving the vehicle in AUTO, the front
axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent only
to the front and rear wheels automatically based
on driving conditions. Driving in this mode results in
slightly lower fuel economy than Two-Wheel-Drive High.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel-Drive High or
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
{ CAUTION:
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High or AUTO
position. This can be done at any speed, except
when shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive Low. The indicator
light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when
the shift is completed.
Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause
the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See
Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive High position.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting
from Four-Wheel-Drive Low. The indicator light will flash
while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is
completed.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle. See
Shifting Into Four-Wheel-Drive Low
If the SERVICE 4–Wheel Drive message stays on, you
should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for
service. See “Service 4–Wheel Drive message” under
When Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehicle speed
should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed
operation in Four-Wheel-Drive Low may damage
or shorten the life of the drivetrain.
To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method
for shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have
the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn
the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator
light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting
the transmission into gear.
in ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of
Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the
Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive High
position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive
High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive High indicator light to
stop flashing and remain on before shifting the
transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To
help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To
help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High
ranges or from N (Neutral) with the engine running.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low
position when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the vehicle
is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission
is in N (Neutral). After 30 seconds the transfer case
will shift to Four-Wheel-Drive High mode.
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High
ranges or from N (Neutral) with the engine running.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel-Drive High switch position
when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive High
indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in N (Neutral).
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low to Four-Wheel-Drive
High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive High, the vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h)
with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
Shifting into Neutral
To shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following:
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
Shifting Out of Neutral
To shift out of N (Neutral) do the following:
2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
information.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
4. Put the transmission in N (Neutral).
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off,
and shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
3. Turn the transfer case dial to Two-Wheel-Drive
High, Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO.
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel Drive High.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral)
until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral)
light starts blinking. This will take at least
After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral),
the N (Neutral) light will go out.
10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial to the four
low position. The N (Neutral) light will come on when
the transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To
help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
7. If the engine is running, make sure that the transfer
case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to
R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the
transmission to D (Drive) for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park).
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at
least 5 mph (8 km/h).
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with
the parking brake symbol, located above the parking
brake pedal.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
For vehicles with a release handle, set the parking
brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then
pushing down the parking brake pedal.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
page 3-42.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking
brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly
pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the parking
brake is not released when you begin to drive, the
brake system warning light will flash and a chime will
sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
For vehicles without a release handle, set the parking
brake by holding the regular brake pedal down,
then pushing down the parking brake pedal.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
page 3-42.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
as far as it will go.
Shifting Into Park
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in N (Neutral).
{ CAUTION:
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
With four-wheel drive, if the transfer case is in
N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if
the shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
N (Neutral). If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking
brake.
information.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If
you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked
into P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver
page 2-52.
If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case is
in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if
the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral).
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You
or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running unless you have to.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, then
you will be able to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into P (Park).
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
vehicle serviced soon.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
Parking Over Things That Burn
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons for the OnStar® system. See your dealer/retailer
for more information about OnStar® and how to
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in
N (Neutral) will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission shift lever is in P (Park). So,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral). Always set the parking brake.
more information about the services OnStar® provides.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
or off.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera
for more information.
Mirrors
If the vehicle has RVC, the O button may not be
available.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the
headlamps of the vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each
time the ignition is turned to start.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Outside Towing Mirrors
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle
and the area behind are seen.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex
mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted
for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually
pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
Manually fold the mirrors forward or rearward. The lower
portion of the mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved to see more from the driver seat. The
convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the driver
preferred position for better vision.
The mirror may have a turn signal arrow that flashes in
the direction of the turn or lane change.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Vehicles with outside
Vehicles with outside
power foldaway mirrors
have controls located
on the driver door.
power mirrors have
controls located on the
driver door.
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger
side mirror.
Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to adjust the mirror.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the
vehicle and the area behind are seen.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
Turn Signal Indicator
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
The vehicle may also have a turn signal indicator on the
mirror. An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction
of the turn or lane change.
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Park Tilt Mirrors
If the vehicle has the memory package, the passenger
and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets the
driver view the curb when parallel parking. The
mirror(s) return to the original position when the vehicle
is shifted out of R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
off or to OFF/LOCK.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror
controls to reset them to their normal position. A popping
noise may be heard during the resetting of the power
foldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual
folding operation.
Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
Automatic Dimming
The driver outside mirror adjusts for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Convex Mirror
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
{ CAUTION:
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors. Only the upper glass of the mirror is heated.
The lower convex part of the mirror is not heated.
Depending on the vehicle’s features, see “Rear Window
Defogger” under, Climate Control System (With Air
information.
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If
you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit
a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
{ CAUTION:
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on
the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to
an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at
least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground.
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The display is located near
the passenger side rear
window and can be seen by
looking over your right
shoulder.
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below tailgate level.
Objects must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear
bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or
humid weather.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 40 inches (1 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur continuously when the vehicle
is at 23 inches (0.6 m) or closer to an object.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected
object:
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
English
8 ft
40 in
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
amber/amber/red lights
and continuous beeping
for five seconds
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and continuous
beeping for five seconds
23 in
1 ft
0.6 m
0.3 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light
on the rear display will flash.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system can be
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
disabled by pressing the
rear park aid disable button
located next to the radio.
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:
The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off, see DIC Warnings and
the message.
• The driver disables the system.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and
slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your
Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate is
lowered, it may not detect an object behind your
vehicle, and you might back into the object and
damage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgate is
closed when using URPA or turn off URPA when
driving with the tailgate lowered.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the tailgate during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the
rear display. Once the attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles Without Navigation System
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area
behind the vehicle. When the key is in the ON/RUN
position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse),
the video image automatically appears on the inside rear
view mirror. Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the
video image automatically disappears from the inside
rear view mirror.
This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.
Read this entire section before using it.
{ CAUTION:
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not
replace driver vision. RVC does not:
• Detect objects that are outside the camera’s
field of view, below the bumper, or
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
Off or On
underneath the vehicle.
To turn off the rear vision camera system, press and
• Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
hold z , located on the inside rearview mirror, until the
left indicator light turns off. The rear camera vision
display is now disabled.
Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear
vision camera screen, or use the screen during
longer, higher speed backing maneuvers or where
there could be cross-traffic. Your judged distances
using the screen will differ from actual distances.
To turn the rear vision camera system on again, press
and hold z until the left indicator light illuminates.
The rear vision camera system display is now enabled
and the display will appear in the mirror normally.
So if you do not use proper care before backing up,
you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist,
or pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has the RVC system,
always check carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the vehicle.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles With Navigation System
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the
area behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts
the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once
the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the navigation
screen will go back to the last screen that had been
displayed, after a delay.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
On or Off
To turn the rear vision camera system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
4. Select the Video screen button. When the Video
screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on.
2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure
menu options, then press the MENU hard key
to select Display or touch the Display screen button.
The delay that is received after shifting out of
R (Reverse) is approximately 10 seconds. The delay
can be cancelled by performing one of the following:
3. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button. The
Rear Camera Options screen will display.
• Pressing a hard key on the navigation system.
• Shifting in to P (Park).
• Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
There is a message on the rear vision camera screen
that states “Check Surroundings for Safety”.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The symbols appear when an object has been detected
by the URPA system. The symbol may cover the
object when viewing the navigation screen.
Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of
the Screen
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen,
press the MENU button while the rear vision camera
image is on the display. Any adjustments made will only
affect the rear vision camera screen.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Make sure that URPA has not been disabled.
2. Shift into P (Park).
3. Press the MENU hard key to enter the configure
menu options, then press the MENU hard key
repeatedly until Display is selected or touch
the Display screen button.
] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus)
screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness
of the screen.
_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen
buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the
screen.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
5. Touch the Symbols screen button. The screen
button will be highlighted when on.
Symbols
The navigation system may have a feature that lets the
driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using
the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
(URPA) system must not be disabled to use the caution
symbols. If URPA has been disabled and the symbols
have been turned on, the Rear Parking Assist Symbols
Unavailable error message may display. See Ultrasonic
Rear Vision Camera Error Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera System: This message
can display when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists, see
your dealer/retailer.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Vision Camera Location
The image is provided by the camera located in the
bezel for the tailgate handle.
The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual
distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited.
The camera does not display objects which are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the bumper. The
area displayed on the screen can vary according to
vehicle orientation or road conditions.
The following illustration shows the field of view that the
camera provides.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disconnecting the Rear Vision Camera
To disconnect the camera:
1. Remove the license plate.
2. Disconnect the camera connector from the chassis
harness, located behind the license plate, by
pressing on the release tab on the chassis harness.
A. Chassis harness
B. Release tab
C. Protective connector cap
D. Camera connector cap
5. Lift up on the camera connector cap tab and remove
the camera connector cap from the chassis harness,
then install the camera connector cap on the camera
connector.
6. Release the rear vision camera cable from the
retaining clip.
A. Camera connector D. Camera connector
cap tab
E. Retaining clip
B. Chassis harness
C. Release tab
F. Protective connector cap
G. Camera connector cap
7. Loosen the camera harness grommet from the
pickup box and feed the harness through the
pickup box.
3. Disconnect the protective connector cap from the
chassis harness by pressing on the release tab on
the chassis harness, then remove the cap.
more information.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall the rear vision camera
and make sure the grommet and connection is secure.
4. Install the protective connector cap onto the chassis
harness where the camera connector was located.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear vision camera system display in the rearview
mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to one
of the following conditions. If this occurs the left
indicator light on the mirror will flash.
When the System Does Not Seem To
Work Properly
The rear vision camera system might not work properly
or display a clear image if:
• A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal, or
no video signal present during the reverse cycle.
• The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear
Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section.
• A fast flash may indicate that the display has been
on for the maximum allowable time during a
reverse cycle, or the display has reached an Over
Temperature limit.
• It is dark.
• The sun or the beam of headlights is shining
directly into the camera lens.
The fast flash conditions are used to protect the
video device from high temperature conditions. Once
conditions return to normal the device will reset
and the green indicator will stop flashing.
• Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the
camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water,
and wipe it with a soft cloth.
• The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the
position and mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure
to have the camera and its position and mounting
angle checked at your dealer/retailer.
During any of these fault conditions, the display will be
blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long
as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or until the conditions
return to normal.
Pressing and holding z when the left indicator light is
flashing will turn off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
• There are extreme temperature changes.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available
until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After
the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a
monthly or annual subscription payment plan. If a
payment plan is not selected, the OnStar system and all
services, including airbag notification and emergency
services, may be deactivated and no longer available.
For more information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca
(Canada), or press the OnStar button to speak with
an advisor.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for
60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles. To
check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press
the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few
simple voice commands to browse through the various
topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information. This feature is only available in the
continental U.S.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is
pressed, the emergency button is pressed, or if the
airbags or AACN system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding
the crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was hit). When
the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling
is used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle’s
GPS location so they can provide services where it is
located.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired
for that area has coverage, network capacity and
reception when the service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming. The
programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After pressing this button, complete the
following steps in less than 30 seconds.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
To program up to three devices:
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of
dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do
not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when the
original hand held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button may need to be
held for up to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Cupholders
Vehicles with cupholders, have them located on and
behind the center console and in the rear seat armrest.
Pull the loop down on the rear seat armrest to access
the cupholders.
Pull downward on the lid to access the cupholders
behind the center console.
Press and hold the driver side of the handle in and pull
out on the exposed portion of the handle to access
the storage area.
Instrument Panel Storage
Vehicles that have an instrument panel storage area,
have it located above the glove box.
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage
Luggage Carrier
Vehicles with an upper and lower center console
storage area, cupholders are included.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage
the vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
For vehicles with a luggage carrier, items can be loaded
on top of the vehicle.
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof. It
can also have crossrails which can be moved back
and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
siderails or siderail supports.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-32.
Make sure the cargo is properly loaded.
Pull the lever (A) up to access the upper storage area.
Raise the upper storage bin, then pull the lever (B)
up to access the lower storage area. Use the key to lock
and unlock the lower storage area.
2-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving,
periodically stop and check to make sure cargo is still
securely fastened.
Rear Seat Armrest
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, have two cupholders.
Pull the armrest down from the rear seatback to
access the cupholders.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood
to the siderail supports.
Cargo Management System
• Tie the load and secure it to the crossrails or the
siderail supports. Use the crossrails only to keep
the load from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift
the release lever up, on both sides of the rail. Then
slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing
the force side to side. Press the release lever
down on both sides of the rail, down to tighten it.
Try to slide the crossrail back and forth slightly
to make sure it is tight.
For vehicles with a cargo management system, it is
located in the bed of the truck. The system contains
three rails located on the front and sides of the bed.
The system has four adjustable cargo tie-downs,
that can be placed on the upper and lower slides
of the rail.
• To carry long items, move the crossrails as far
apart as possible. Tie the load to the crossrails and
the siderails or siderail supports. Also tie the
load to the bumpers, but do not tie the load so
tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located
above the rear window glass.
Make sure items loaded on the roof of the vehicle do
not block or damage the CHMSL.
2-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove or install cargo tie-downs at the front of the
bed, slide the corner cap towards the center of the
bed to expose the rail notches. To remove the corner
cap, pull either edge away from the rail.
To remove the system, loosen the toggle bolts on each
rail until they can be removed from the bed of the
truck. To replace the system, place the toggle bolts and
rails into their original locations and tighten them to a
torque setting of 12.5 ft lbs (17 Y ).
If the system is removed to install a bed liner, make
sure there is no bed liner material in the installation
points.
Notice: If cargo is tied down using the horizontal
slots on the top of the pickup box, the box could be
damaged. Using the horizontal slots on the top of
the pickup box for tie-down locations may cause
damage to the pickup box and would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Only use the tie-down
loops if the vehicle does not have the cargo
management system.
To adjust a tie-down, pull the locator pin out and move
the tie-down to another location making sure the
locator pin lines up with a locator hole on the rail. The
tie-down pin may not be installed correctly if the pin does
not line up, turn it over and reinstall. The tie-down will
not move when the pin is completely installed. The
maximum load for each rail is 500 lbs (227 kg).
The rails are notched at each end which allows the
tie-downs to be removed and placed on another rail. To
remove, pull the locator pin out and slide the tie-down
to the end of the rail and pull back.
2-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open: From the vent position, the sunroof can be fully
opened either manually or by using the express-open
feature. To open manually, press the rear of the switch
to the first depression and hold until the sunroof has
reached the desired position. To open using
express-open, press the rear of the switch fully and
release. The sunroof will move to the full open position.
To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a
second time.
Sunroof
On vehicle with a power sliding sunroof, the ignition
needs to be turned to RUN, or the Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be activated to open or close the
sunroof. When RAP is active, the sunroof will work for
10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or until
the driver’s door is opened. See Retained Accessory
Close: From the vent, or open position, press and hold
the front of the switch to close the sunroof.
Extended Cab
If your vehicle is an
extended cab, the sunroof
switch is located on the
headliner above the
rearview mirror.
The sunroof also has a roller sunshade that can be
used to block the rays of the sun. The roller sunshade
can be manually operated with the sunroof in an open or
closed position. To open the sunshade, press and
unlatch it, and roll it back. To close, pull it forward and
latch it into the closed position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the rear
of the switch to vent the sunroof. To close the sunroof,
press and hold the front of the switch.
2-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver’s
side switch. The sunroof will open automatically. To stop
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. To
express-close the sunroof, fully press and release the
front of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will close
automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press the
switch a second time.
Crew Cab
If your vehicle is a crew
cab, there are two sunroof
switches located in the
overhead console above
the rearview mirror.
The sunroof also has a sunshade which you can pull
forward to block sun rays. The sunshade must be opened
and closed manually.
Anti-Pinch Feature (Crew Cab Only): If an object is in
the path of the sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch
feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from
closing at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will
then open halfway, and the air deflector will raise. To
close the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
Express-Close or Manual-Close functions described
previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and there
is an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the
sunroof. To close the sunroof once it has stopped, refer to
the Vent functions described previously.
Vent: From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof. To close the
sunroof, press and hold the front of the passenger’s
side switch.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close
the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
Do not leave the sunroof open for long periods of time
while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in
the tracks and damage the sunroof operation and plug
the water draining system.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
2-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Voltmeter Gage (US-Canada) .........................3-41
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
(If Equipped).
R. Automatic Transfer Case Control (If Equipped).
Range Selection Mode (Allison Transmission
and Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Button (If Equipped).
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-62
(If Equipped). Pedal Adjust Button (If Equipped).
page 2-26. Heated Windshield Washer Fluid Button
I. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped).
W. Power Take Off (PTO) Control (If Equipped).
See Power Take Off (PTO) in the Duramax Diesel
Supplement Index.
X. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If Equipped).
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
on page 2-28.
Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Pedal Adjust Button (If Equipped). See Adjustable
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-62
(If Equipped). Heated Windshield Washer Fluid
page 3-12.
J. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped).
on page 3-20.
L. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped).
V. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If Equipped).
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
The tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on top of the steering column, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble. Press again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols located on
the steering wheel.
The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the
steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever for less than one second
until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change.
This causes the turn signals to automatically flash
three times. It will flash six times if tow-haul mode is
active. Holding the turn signal lever for more than
one second will cause the turn signals to flash until
you release the lever.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N : Windshield Wipers
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
L : Windshield Washer
Flash-to-Pass.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
page 5-122.
Exterior Lamps.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC).
To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low
beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you. The
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. Release the lever to return to normal operation.
5 3 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
Windshield Wipers
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle. Hold it
there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers
stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer,
for more wipe cycles.
cluster will also be on.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
For vehicles with Rainsense™ II windshield wipers, the
moisture sensor is located next to the inside rearview
mirror and is mounted on the windshield. When active,
these sensors are able to detect moisture on the
windshield and automatically turn on the wipers.
6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time.
The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can
be very useful in light rain or snow.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed): For high-speed wiping.
To turn on the Rainsense feature, the wipers must be
set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
of the sensor.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently
loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not
clear the windshield well, making it harder to see
and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,
Since different drivers have different setting preferences,
it is recommended that the mid-range setting (position 3)
be used initially. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings located
closer to the off position on the multifunction lever.
The sensor will automatically control the frequency of the
wipes from the off setting to the high speed setting
according to the weather conditions. The wipers can be
left in a rainsense mode even when it is not raining.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
When Rainsense is active, the headlamps will turn on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO
position and the wipers are active.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Windshield Washer
Windshield Washer
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from the windshield.
{ CAUTION:
_ (Heated Washer Fluid): Press the heated washer
fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer
fluid system. This activation initiates four heated
wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take
up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to
begin. Press the button again to turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically
turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
The wipers clear the window and then either stop or
return to the preset speed.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer nozzles
for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.
This is a normal condition.
HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING is
displayed on the DIC when the washer system is heating
the fluid. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is
displayed when the washer fluid is low. See DIC
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the brakes are applied, cruise control is turned off.
Cruise Control
For vehicles with an Allison® or Hydra-Matic 6-speed
automatic transmission, see “Grade Braking and Cruise
Grade Braking (Allison Transmission) under Tow/Haul
control interacts with the Range Selection Mode,
tow/haul and grade braking systems.
For vehicles with the StabiliTrak® system that begins to
limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used
again, it can be turned back on.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are not
using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise control.
T (On/Off): Turns the system on or off. The indicator
light is on when cruise control is on and turns off
when cruise control is off.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
1. Press T .
2. Get up to the desired speed.
SET – (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make
the vehicle decelerate.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the brakes are applied while the cruise control is set,
the cruise control is disengaged. But it does not
need to be reset.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle will go back to the
previous set speed and stay there.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will
slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. While going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. While going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.
When the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off.
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Ending Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control:
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
• Press [ on the steering wheel.
• Press T on the steering wheel.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased,
when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will
only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on
for a set time. The time of the delay can be changed
using the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-53.
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
O (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to turn the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
with the following:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• License Plate Lamps
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are
turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to
prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the
headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp
on position to make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The transmission is not in P (Park).
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights,
and other lamps will not be on.
Push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to change the headlamps from low
beam to high beam.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
control to the OFF position and then release.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission
must be in the P (Park) position, before the DRL lamps
can be turned off.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and the ignition is
off and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn the
light off.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system is only affected when the
light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness,
along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps,
and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also
be dim.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel
brightness control is in the full bright position.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release
it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission
must be in the P (Park) position, before the automatic
headlamp system can be turned off.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates
when the automatic headlamps turn on. Do not cover the
sensor or the headlamps will come on whenever the
ignition is on.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the control to the off position.
The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. This feature can be programmed using the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
The regular headlamp system can be turned on when
needed.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Puddle Lamps
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp
If the vehicle has this feature, this button includes wiring
provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to
install an auxiliary roof lamp.
If the vehicle has puddle lamps, they come on when the
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Transmitter is pressed. The lamps time out or turn off
once the engine is started.
This button is located on
the overhead console.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the control is located next
to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel,
to the left of the steering column.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog
lamps to come on.
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the button will
activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the
bottom of this button. Pressing the top of the button
will turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator.
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the fog lamps on or off.
A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
automatically turn on.
The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps,
so the total current draw of the attached lamps
should be less than this value. The attachment points
for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires located
above the overhead console, a dark green switched
power wire and a black ground wire.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
fog lamps also go off. When the high-beam headlamps
are turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For further information on roof mount emergency lamp
installation, please visit the GM Upfitter website at
www.gmupfitters.com or contact your dealer.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
If the vehicle has this button, the vehicle may have the
snow plow prep package. For further information see
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the
button again to return it to the extended position so that
the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
Instrument Panel Brightness
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and is located next to the exterior lamp control.
Entry Lighting
The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.
Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the extended
position. If the dome override button is pressed in,
the lamps will not come on.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the instrument panel lights. Turning the
knob to the farthest clockwise position turns on the
dome lamps.
Exit Lighting
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The interior lamps come on when the key is removed
from the ignition. They turn off automatically in
20 seconds. The lights do not come on if the dome
override button is pressed in.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position,
the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened
or closed.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reading Lamps
Electric Power Management
For vehicles with reading lamps, they are located on the
overhead console.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located
next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button
again.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back
up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is
lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a
problem, an alert will be displayed.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp.
If the vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, press the lamp lenses to turn the lamps on
or off.
The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that
is needed for very high electrical loads.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamps come on by turning the instrument
panel brightness control knob to the farthest clockwise
position. This knob is located on the instrument
panel and also turns on the dome lamps.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
The cargo lamp can be used if more light is needed
in the cargo area of the vehicle or in the top-box
storage units.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located below the climate control system, or may have
one accessory power outlet and one cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the
receptacle closest to the driver.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might be displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or
LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads
as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-66.
There may be another accessory power outlet in the
rear cargo area. If the vehicle has a floor console,
there is an accessory power outlet inside the storage
bin and one on the rear of the floor console.
To use an accessory power outlet, remove the protective
cap. When not in use, always cover the accessory
power outlet with the protective cap.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
This feature shuts off the dome and reading lamps,
if they are left on for more than 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned off. The cargo lamp shuts off
after 20 minutes. This prevents the battery from
running down.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power plugs.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have a front ashtray located near the
center of the instrument panel. Pull on the door to
open it. The ashtray may have a cigarette lighter.
The accessory power outlets are powered, even when
the ignition is in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause the
vehicle’s battery to run down.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
To remove the ashtray, open the door and pull the
ashtray bin toward you. To replace the ashtray, insert
the ashtray bin inside the ashtray door and press down
until it engages. To use the cigarette lighter, push it
in all the way, and let go. When it is ready for use, the
lighter pops back out.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
(With Air Conditioning)
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front
system off.
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation
can be controlled.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle. The knob can be positioned between
two modes to select a combination of those modes.
Select from the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the windshield and side window
outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air. Recirculation cannot be selected
in floor mode.
A. Fan Control
D. Air Conditioning
E. Outside Air
F. Recirculation
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
G. Rear Window Defogger
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defog
or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one
of these modes, the indicator light flashes three times
and then turns off. While in recirculation mode the
windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp.
To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase the fan speed.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and the side window vents, with some air
directed to the floor vents. The system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected in the defog
or defrost mode. When either mode is selected, the
system runs the air conditioning compressor, unless the
outside temperature is close to freezing.
The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing
the outside air button, or by turning off the ignition.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning is on. The air conditioning
can be selected in any mode as long as the fan switch
is on.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that
outside air is on. In this mode outside air circulates
throughout the vehicle. The outside air mode can
be used with all modes, but it cannot be used with the
recirculation mode.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that
recirculation is on.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Climate Control System
(With Heater Only)
For vehicles with a rear window defogger, a warming
grid is used to remove fog from the rear window.
With this system the heating and ventilation can be
controlled.
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger
on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to
show that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN. The rear window defogger stays on
for approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed,
unless the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF. The defogger can also be turned off by
turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the windshield, side window, and
second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front
system off.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle. The knob can be
positioned between two modes to select a combination
of those modes.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and the side window vents, with some air
directed to the floor vents. The system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle.
Select from the following:
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system
on or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is
directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. Recirculation can
be selected once you have selected vent or bi-level
mode. The temperature can also be adjusted using
either temperature button. If the air delivery mode or
temperature settings are adjusted with the system
off, the display illuminates briefly to show the settings
and then returns to off. The system can be turned back
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can
be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
on by pressing either O , D , C , # , the defrost or
the AUTO button.
Driver and Passenger Side Temperature
Controls
The driver and passenger side temperature buttons are
used to adjust the temperature of the air coming
through the system on the driver or passenger’s side of
the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if
the system is turned off. This is possible since outside
air always flows through the system as the vehicle
is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
A. Driver and Passenger G. Air Delivery Mode
Temperature Controls
B. Fan Control
C. AUTO
Control
H. Display
I. Power Button
J. Rear Window Defogger
K. Air Conditioning
L. PASS (Passenger)
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The driver side or passenger side
temperature display shows the temperature setting
decreasing or increasing.
D. Defrost
E. Recirculation
F. Outside Air
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the
PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator.
When the passenger’s temperature setting is set
different than the driver’s setting, the indicator on the
PASS button illuminates and both the driver side
and passenger side temperature displays are shown.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Use the driver or
passenger temperature buttons to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If a temperature
setting of 60°F (15°C) is chosen, the system
remains at the maximum cooling setting. If a
temperature setting of 90°F (32°C) is chosen,
the system remains at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the
vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later
in this section.
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display changes to
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO is lit on
the display. The current air delivery mode and
fan speed are also displayed for about 5 seconds.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
delays turning the fan on until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch overrides this
delay and changes the fan to a selected speed.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet are automatically controlled.
The air conditioning compressor may run when
the outside temperature is above freezing. The air
inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it is
hot outside, the air inlet may automatically switch to
the recirculate mode to help quickly cool down
the air inside the vehicle. The light on the button
comes on in recirculation.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some to the windshield, side window outlets, and
second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air.
D C (Fan Control): Press these buttons to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
Pressing either fan button while in automatic control
places the fan under manual control. The fan setting
remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off. The air
delivery mode remains under automatic control.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. In this mode, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is close to
freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected
while in the defrost mode.
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press these buttons
to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode
appears on the display. Pressing either mode button
while the system is off changes the air delivery mode
without turning the system on. Pressing either mode
button while in automatic control places the mode under
manual control.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield
and side window vents, with some directed to the
floor vents. In this mode, the system automatically forces
outside air into the vehicle and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is close
to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected
while in the defrost mode.
The air delivery mode setting is displayed and the
AUTO light turns off. The fan remains under automatic
control.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards the
windshield and side window outlets.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
(A/C) compressor on and off. An indicator light comes on
to show that the air conditioning is on.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defog, or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected
with one of those modes, the indicator light flashes
three times and then turns off. The air conditioning
compressor also comes on when this mode is activated.
While in recirculation mode the windows may fog
when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the
fan speed.
If this button is pressed when the air conditioning
compressor is unavailable due to outside conditions, the
indicator flashes three times and then turns off. If the air
conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops
below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning
to be effective, the air conditioning light turns off to show
that the air conditioning mode has been canceled.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let
hot inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it
takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing
the outside air button, or by turning off the ignition.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
; (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light on the button comes on to show
that outside is on. When selected, air from outside
the vehicle circulates throughout the vehicle. The outside
air mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot be
used with the recirculation mode.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that the
recirculation is on.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Sensors
The solar sensor, located
in the defrost grille, in the
middle of the instrument
panel, monitors the
solar heat. Do not cover
the solar sensor or
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): For vehicles with
this feature, press to turn the defogger on or off.
It automatically turns off several minutes after it has
been activated. The defogger can also be turned off by
turning the engine off. Do not drive the vehicle until
all the windows are clear.
the system will not work
properly.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
The interior temperature
sensor, located in the
headliner, measures the
temperature of the air
inside the vehicle.
Heated Mirrors: For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or
frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window
defog button is pressed. See Outside Power Mirrors
on page 2-59.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could
cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the
air delivery mode. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Outlet Adjustment
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow. Use the
thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off the
airflow.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets
at the base of the windshield that could block the
flow of air into the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster (US-Canada)
United States Light Duty Premium version shown. Canada, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Clusters similar.
The instrument cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about
how much fuel the vehicle has and many other things needed to drive safely and economically. For vehicles with
a DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the voltmeter, to toggle between the
trip odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the
reset button for approximately one second while the trip
odometer is displayed will reset it.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The Driver Information Center (DIC) can also display
the number of hours the engine has run. To display the
engine hours, turn the ignition off, press and hold the
reset button for at least four seconds. The hour meter
displays for up to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is
turned on. See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm). For a description of how Grade Braking
affects vehicle speed while the Tow/Haul Mode is
activated, see “Grade Braking (Allison Transmission®)”
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{ CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the right front passenger airbag is manually
turned off using the airbag on-off switch in the glove box,
the indicator light OFF or the off symbol will come on
and stay on as a reminder that the airbag has been
turned off. This light will go off when the airbag has been
more information, including important safety information.
Airbag Off Light
If the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch, it also has
a passenger airbag status indicator located in the
overhead console.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, will light for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol, will light to
let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
United States
Canada
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and help
protect the person sitting there.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the
vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group identified by
page 1-81 for more on this, including important
safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it means that the
right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may
information, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the airbag on-off switch.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If the vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
the overhead console will have a passenger airbag
status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-84 for important safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to
let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gage (US-Canada)
This light comes on briefly
For vehicles with a
voltmeter gage, this gage
indicates the battery
voltage when the ignition
is turned on.
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it
stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also
for more information. This light could indicate that
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
When the ignition is on, this gage indicates the battery
voltage.
When the engine is running, this gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage can
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading. This is normal. If the vehicle is operating
outside the normal operating range, the charging system
page 3-41 for more information. The voltmeter gage
may also read lower when in fuel economy mode.
This is normal.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Readings outside the normal operating range can also
occur when a large number of electrical accessories
are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling
for an extended period. This condition is normal
since the charging system is not able to provide full
power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased,
this condition should correct itself as higher engine
speeds allow the charging system to create maximum
power.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
comes on when the parking brake is set. If the vehicle
is driven with the parking brake engaged, a chime
sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h).
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking, both
parts need to be working well.
The vehicle can only be driven for a short time with the
readings outside the normal operating range. If the
vehicle must be driven, turn off all accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have the brake system
inspected right away.
Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a
possible problem in the electrical system. Have the
vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
This light can also come on due to low brake fluid.
United States
Canada
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
{ CAUTION:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on,
the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push or
might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
(US-Canada)
For vehicles with the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light comes on briefly while
starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there
could be a problem with the StabiliTrak® system and the
vehicle might need service. When this warning light is
on, the StabiliTrak® system is off and does not limit
wheel spin.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage will
read 210°F (100°C) or less. If the vehicle is pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature
to fluctuate and go over the 235°F (113°C) mark.
However, if the gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark,
it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond
its capacity.
The light flashes if the system is active and is working
to assist the driver with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
information.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for
about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-75 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
information.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run
as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Oil Pressure Gage (US-Canada)
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
United States
Canada
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently
been replaced or if the battery has run down.
The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate
critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine
driving. If this has been done and the vehicle still
does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.
For vehicles with an engine oil pressure gage, it shows
the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square
inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles
indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure can vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but if readings are outside
the normal operating range, the oil pressure light
more information.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading outside the normal operating range can be
caused by a dangerously low oil level or some
other problem causing low oil pressure. Check the
vehicle’s oil as soon as possible. See “OIL PRESSURE
Oil Pressure Light
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not
flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be
low on oil and it might have some other system problem.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-17.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
for more information.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
Fuel Gage
The four-wheel-drive light
comes on when a vehicle
with a manual transfer
case is shifted into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
Some delay between the shifting and the light coming
on is normal.
information.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows about
how much fuel is left in the fuel tank.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
This light comes on when
the Tow/Haul mode has
been activated.
The gage will first indicate empty before the vehicle
is out of fuel, but the vehicle’s fuel tank should be
filled soon.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message appears. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-66 for more information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light, under the fuel
gage, comes on briefly
while the engine is being
started.
Here are some situations owners can experience with
the fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the fuel tank’s
capacity to fill it.
This light and a chime comes on when the fuel tank is
low on fuel. The Driver Information Center also displays
a “FUEL LEVEL LOW” message. See DIC Warnings
When fuel is added this light and message should
go off. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
• The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
For a diesel engine, see “Fuel Gage” in the Diesel
Engine Supplement.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
displays warning messages if a system problem is
detected.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below
explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and
page 3-76 for the displays available.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
on page 3-76 for more information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use
the trip odometer reset stem to view some of the
DIC displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)” later in this section.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in
this section for the displays available.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles
with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), trailer
brake gain and output information for vehicles with
the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
engine hours, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming, compass zone setting, and compass
recalibration.
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions are
detailed in the following
pages.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
information.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature.
The compass and outside temperature will also be
shown in the display. The temperature will be shown
in °F or °C depending on the units selected.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed
by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the
ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display
the odometer.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold
the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display
will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “Units” later in this section.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last
reset for the trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also display the trip odometer.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Range
Fuel Used
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle
can be driven without refueling. The display will show
LOW if the fuel level is low.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC.
The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will
return to zero.
Average Economy
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press
and hold the set/reset button.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine)
on page 6-4 for more information.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
Blank Display
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system,
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Units
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information
will then be displayed in the unit of measurement
selected.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in
the OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake
for more information.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
information.
Engine Hours
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Relearn Remote Key
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE
transmitter to your vehicle:
Trailer Gain and Output
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in
the DIC. Press the vehicle information button until
TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display.
1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V
TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
information below explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by
pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information,
and warning messages if a system problem is detected.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can
use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following
displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer,
transmission temperature, trailer brake gain and output
information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer
Brake Control (ITBC) system, compass zone setting,
compass recalibration, oil life, Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) programming for vehicles with the
TPMS, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming, and display language.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Compass Zone Setting
This display allows for setting the compass zone.
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating the compass.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the trip
odometer reset stem to view the following displays:
odometer, engine hours, trip odometer, and display
language.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the
ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the
trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last
turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display
will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Engine Hours
To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in
LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total
number of hours the engine has run.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP
displays. This display shows the temperature of the
automatic transmission fluid in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailer Gain and Output
Oil Life
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the
DIC. Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER
GAIN and OUTPUT display.
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will
alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with
your driving conditions.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine)
on page 6-4 for more information.
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in
the OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake
for more information.
Compass Zone Setting
This display allows for setting the compass zone.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system,
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating the compass.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
Relearn Tire Positions
Your vehicle may have this display. To access this
display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor,
the system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn
the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System
page 3-66 for more information.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the
first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
Relearn Remote Key
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an
RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN
REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
will display.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language
DIC Compass
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
the currently set language displays.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem to scroll through all of the available languages.
The available languages are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and
NO CHANGE.
Compass variance is the difference between the
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
If the compass is not set to the zone where you live,
the compass may give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle
is traveling.
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons,
press the trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE
COMPASS ZONE displays.
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons,
press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
two seconds to select the next available variance
zone. Repeat this step until the appropriate
variance zone is displayed.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
Compass Calibration
2. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V
TO CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass) displays.
Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press
the trip odometer reset stem until CALIBRATE
COMPASS displays.
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in
circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate away
from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or
other industrial structures, if possible.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem
for two seconds to start the compass calibration.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display,
the compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount,
a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
move the magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and
calibrate the compass.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display CALIBRATION
COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration
is complete. The DIC display will then return to
the previous menu.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the display.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure
in one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be
checked. This message also displays LEFT FRONT,
RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to
indicate which tire needs to be checked. You can
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read the other messages that may have been sent
at the same time, press the set/reset button or the
trip odometer reset stem. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
see the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tire pressure values. See “DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)” earlier in this section. If the tire
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off.
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the
ignition back on. This message clears if the trailer
is reconnected. This message also clears if you
acknowledge it. If this message still displays, either
your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your
dealer/retailer.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime
may sound when one of the following conditions exists:
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
• A trailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected
from the vehicle.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stopped, this message clears itself after a
short time.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out
of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
moving, this message stays on until the ignition
is turned off.
• There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer
brakes.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
on page 3-44. To avoid added strain on a hot engine,
the air conditioning compressor automatically turns
off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
for more information.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
This message displays when the engine oil becomes
hotter than the normal operating temperature. Stop and
allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
for more information.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
information.
HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF
This message displays when the heated windshield
washer has been turned off. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-12 for more information.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES
PENDING
This message displays when the heated windshield
washer system is heating the fluid. See Windshield
HOOD OPEN
FAST IDLE ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is
not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the fast idle feature is on. See Fast Idle System
on page 2-25 for more information.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
PARK ASSIST OFF
This message displays when ice conditions are possible.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started,
this message displays to remind the driver that
the URPA system has been turned off. Press the
set/reset button or the trip odometer reset stem to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display. To turn the URPA system back on, see
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab)
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
This message displays and a chime sounds if the front
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the
information.
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-4.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab)
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
This message displays if a problem occurs with the
four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Make
sure the key is in the LOCK/OFF position for at least
one minute and then restart the vehicle and check
for the message on the DIC display. If the message is
still displayed or appears again when you begin
driving, the four-wheel-drive system needs service.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving,
the brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
page 2-19 for more information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the system is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle.
may cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure
If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is
safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of
StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and
require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
on page 4-6.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message displays and a chime
sounds when there is a problem with the ITBC system.
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
There are several conditions that can cause this message
to appear.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off.
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the
ignition back on. If this message still displays, either
your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your
dealer/retailer.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-42.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
STABILITRAK OFF
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle related
problem has been detected and the vehicle needs
service. See your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel
spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak off
if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it,
• The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted
into 4LO.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off
or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
this light and message off.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
TRAILER CONNECTED
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message displays briefly when
a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to
the vehicle.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message clears itself after several seconds.
This message also clears if you acknowledge it.
After this message clears, the TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT
display appears in the DIC.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the system
is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. See
“DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)”
earlier in this section for more information. The tire
positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires or
after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection and
for more information.
See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT” under DIC Operation
page 3-59 and “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System”
information.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for the location of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer
This message displays along with a sound if the
transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This message clears
and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches
a safe level.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons)
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
You can also change the language by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in
this section for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off
the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows you to
select which doors and when the doors will automatically
page 2-10 for more information.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you
will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter,
and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed
again within five seconds of the previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you
will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
On vehicles with a crew cab, this feature allows you to
select whether or not the locking of the vehicle’s doors
will be delayed. When locking the doors with the power
door lock switch and a door is open, this feature will delay
locking the doors until five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the
delayed locking feature is in use. The key must be out of
the ignition for this feature to work. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock
switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter
information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHIME VOLUME
PARK TILT MIRRORS
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically
tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
for more information.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EASY EXIT RECALL
EASY EXIT SETUP
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
for more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic easy
page 1-8 and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier for more
information.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT RECALL
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing the
easy exit seat button.
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.
BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If the features are
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
driver’s seat will move back when the key is removed from
the ignition or after pressing the easy exit seat button.
SEAT ONLY (Default): The driver’s seat will recall.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the
automatic movement has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory
recall took place prior to removing the key again.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your
preference for the remote memory seat recall feature.
more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On some
vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal
feature, the pedals will also automatically move.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and
page 3-59 for more information on matching transmitters
to driver ID numbers.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
{ CAUTION:
page 4-2.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a
Single CD and DVD Player
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Radio with Optional CD Player
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and
DVD player, it has a H button for setting the time
and date.
If the vehicle has an AM/FM radio with an optional
CD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the time.
With these types of radios, the clock can be set with
either the radio turned on or off.
To set the time and date:
1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
To set the clock:
1. Press the H button until the hour numbers begin
flashing on the display. Press the H button a
second time and the minute numbers begin flashing
on the display. Press the H button a third time and
the 12HR or 24HR time format begins flashing.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to change. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
2. While either the hour or the minute numbers are
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
flashing, turn the f knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio faceplate, clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the time.
While the 12HR or 24HR time format is flashing,
turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to select the default time settings.
press the right ¨SEEK arrow or the \ FWD
(forward) button.
• To decrease, press the left ©SEEK arrow or
the s REV (reverse) button, or turn the f knob,
located on the upper right side of the radio,
to adjust the selected setting.
3. Press the H button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time;
otherwise, the flashing stops after five seconds and
the current time displayed will be automatically set.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
radio has a MENU button instead of the H button to
set the time and date.
To change the time default setting from 12 hours to
24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
To set the time and date:
1. Press the MENU button.
To change the time or date default settings:
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is currently
displayed on the radio screen until the time
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD
(month and day) and DD/MM (day and month)
are displayed.
2. Once the H option displays, press the pushbutton
located under that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to change. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
default, or let the screen time out.
press the right ¨SEEK arrow or the \ FWD
(forward) button.
4. To decrease, press the left ©SEEK arrow or the
s REV (reverse) button, or turn the f knob,
located on the upper right side of the radio, to adjust
the selected setting.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
Radio(s)
To change the time default setting from 12 hours to
24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under
the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
AM-FM Radio
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
Radio with CD and DVD (MP3)
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radios with CD and DVD
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its features are explained
later in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies
upon receiving specific information from these stations
and only works when the information is available.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters displays. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.).
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio): Press to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. While the ignition is off, press this button to
display the time.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H (Clock) (AM-FM Radio): The radio may have a
clock button for setting the time. With this type of radio,
the clock can be set with either the radio turned on
information.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle’s speed changes while driving,
so that the volume level stays consistent.
©SEEK ¨: Press either arrow to go to the previous
or to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
For AM-FM Radio, the station frequency flashes while
the radio is in the scan mode.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
For the AM-FM Radio, scan presets within the current
selected band by pressing and holding either seek arrow
for four seconds until a double beep sounds. The radio
goes to a stored preset, plays for a few seconds if
a strong signal is present, then goes to the next stored
preset. The station frequency flashes while the radio
is in the scan mode.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and
RDS Features): Press to switch the display between
the radio station frequency and the time. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, press 4 to display
the time. For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or RDS
features, press 4 to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or
CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is available during
XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line of the display and
artist information displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO INFO” displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle has XM and has a FAV
button, a maximum of 36 stations can be programmed
as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned
below the radio station frequency labels and by using
the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the
FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of
AM, FM, or XM (if equipped) stations.
Setting Preset Stations (AM-FM Radio)
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons. To program presets:
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously
adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
To store a station as a favorite:
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station will be stored.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
Whenever that pushbutton is pressed and
released, the station that was set, returns.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to store as a favorite.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob
until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting, or adjust the highlighted setting by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward), or s REV
(reverse) button until the desired levels are obtained.
If a station’s frequency is weak or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6
label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
(AM-FM Radio)
Bass/Treble: To adjust the bass or treble, press the
tune knob or the EQ button until the desired tone control
label displays. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting.
The display shows the current bass or treble level.
If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for different
types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk,
jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and
treble settings.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
the desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting, or
adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either
SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until the
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(AM-FM Radio)
desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
` (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance or fade,
press this button or the tune knob until the desired
speaker control label displays. Turn the tune knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
The setting can also be adjusted by pressing the
seek arrows.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio
disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode.
To find XM channels within a desired category:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
removed.
• Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the
category list by pressing the \ FWD or the
s REV button.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM station associated with that category.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the
right or left arrows displayed, or press either
SEEK arrow to go to the previous or to the next
XM station within the selected category.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites again.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Messages
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Locked or Loc: One of these messages will display
when the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the
radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
To insert one CD:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in
the vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the
XM service. For more information, contact XM at
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing. To insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
Radio Messages for XM Only
section for further detail.
the Z button or the DISP knob.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD
symbol displays on the left side of the radio display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording,
the quality of the music that has been recorded, and
the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle
them carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
original cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD player scans
the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch
the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing).
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source. The CD is
controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or
page 3-138 for more information. The DVD/CD decks,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the
CD deck) of the radio are compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the disc
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is
made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds
on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on the
CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the
right arrow to go to the next track.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release to eject the
disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting from a radio
with CD and DVD, ejects from the bottom slot. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The disc can be removed.
If the disc is not removed, after several seconds, the disc
automatically pulls back into the player.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio with
CD and DVD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when
not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway into
the slot. A RDM label displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
To play tracks from a single CD in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order. To use random, do one of the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD player,
insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player.
A RDM label displays.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing.
The CD remains inside the radio for future listening.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under the
RDM label until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.
For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the
radio when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or DVD
remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing
entertainment.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when
a CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
CD player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep
sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or
more discs partway into the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing the track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the
CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-129
for more information.
Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or
Rear Auxiliary Jack.
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio
(AM, FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or
the DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot,
front or rear auxiliary input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat
passengers are able to listen to playback from this source
through the vehicle speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
page 3-129 for more information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote
control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through the
remote control.
In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
speakers can be muted when the RSA power is turned
information.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT
problems.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Radios with a Single CD player or a Six-Disc CD player
has the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
disc. For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R
or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
Radios with CD and DVD has the capability of playing
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
CD Messages
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
Radios with a CD and DVD player displays
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other
messages when an error occurs:
Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down.
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or
unknown format.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a DVD
Using the DVD Player
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the
CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-129
for more information.
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-129
information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3
and WMA formats.
If an error message displays on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-129
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn this
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume. Press and hold for more than
two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system and to start the parental
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
control feature. Parental control prevents the rear seat
occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
system or remote control.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the
CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
A lock symbol displays next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until the knob is
pressed and held for more than two seconds again,
or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits
the vehicle.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the
CD or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and
fast forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date
settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See
the information given earlier in this section specific to the
radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Time”
in the index, for setting the clock and date.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD or
DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the
left arrow to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press the left arrow again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to
eject, press and hold for more than five seconds to
force the disc to eject.
SEEK ¨(Next Track/Chapter): Press the right arrow
to go to the next track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio.
If the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after,
for more information.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control. See
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
located under the navigation arrows to navigate
the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
selection press this button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the
forward arrow is showing on display, the system is in
pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the
system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off,
press the play button to turn the screen on.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after,
for more information.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
screen shows the audio stream changing.
Inserting a Disc
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-129 for more information. The Video Screen
does not automatically power on when the DVD-A
is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned
on by the rear seat occupant through the remote
control power button.
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and show “Loading
Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
automatically play the movie while others default to the
softkey menu display, which requires the Play, Enter,
or Navigation softkeys to be pressed; either by softkey
or by the rear seat passenger using the remote
control.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on the display, the system is in
pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the display,
the system is in playback mode.
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical groupings
on the DVD-A disc.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
is sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into
the DVD player begins to play again. In case loading
and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed
(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject, press
and hold the DVD Z button more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is
sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the
DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
DVD Radio Error Messages
To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the
radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote
control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop
button has been pressed twice on the remote control,
the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc.
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc.
If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed,
the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time.
The disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not
resume play of the disc automatically. If the RSA system
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use
as another source for audio listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycle through
DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio.
The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
Press again and the system automatically searches
for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the
DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles between the two sources and not indicate
“No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device’s volume to the loudest level.
It is always best to power the portable audio device
through its own battery while playing.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player.
Additional volume adjustments might have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft
enough.
more information.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders
and files to read and play.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u extension as other
file extensions might not work.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders, or
playlists could cause the player to be unable to play
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions. To play a large number of files, folders,
playlists or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name.
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side
of the screen but plays both file formats in the order
in which they were recorded to the disc.
MP3 Format
Burning an MP3 disc on a personal computer:
Long names also take up more space on the display,
potentially getting cut off.
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Folder
Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
©SEEK ¨ arrows. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that have
been recorded without using file folders can be played.
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files,
the player allows access and navigates up to the
maximum, but all items over the maximum are not
accessible.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as the CD label. All files
contained directly under the root directory are accessed
prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
are always accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA)
and MP3 files, a folder under the root directory called
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does
not display.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File System and Naming
Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R currently playing.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or CD-RW
in the player it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound will
be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans the
disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to
the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can begin playing
while it is scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins
playing again.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound
will be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW or
all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do
one of the following:
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files by that artist. To listen to MP3 files
by another artist, press the pushbutton located below
either arrow button. The next or previous artist in
alphabetical order plays. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is displayed.
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below
the back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name is displayed on the
second line between the arrows and songs from the
current album begins to play. Once all songs from that
album are played, the player moves to the next album
in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files from that album.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
(.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD
deck. On the CD deck, press the CAT (category) button
to toggle between compressed and uncompressed
audio format, the default being the uncompressed
format (.CDA).
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio
for future listening.
MP3/WMA Format
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and
a message showing disc and/or track number displays
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again
and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Input
Device Found” displays.
Burning an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory are accessed
prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
are always accessed before root folders or files.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u extension as other
file extensions might not work.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. To play a large number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name.
Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the
disc not to function in the player.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allows navigation of the disc. The menu
reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play order),
a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or
down through available folders), a PL tag if the disc has a
Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist
tag is shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey
only or the menu as previously described.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned back on, the CD-R starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays.
The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or
CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold this button for more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R automatically
pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD
cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more
than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA
files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press
the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA files by
another artist, press the pushbutton located below either
arrow button. The disc goes to the next or previous
artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is displayed.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
back label to return to the main music navigator screen.
Now the album name displays on the second line
between the arrows and songs from the current album
begin to play. Once all songs from that album are
played, the player moves to the next album in
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning,
press the pushbutton located below the music
navigator label or eject the disc.
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the
disc in the background. When the scan is finished,
the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside
the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the
CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such as:
DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
earlier in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”
on page 3-129 for more information.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use
the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Bluetooth®
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information on
compatible phones.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System
Pairing
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is
used if the volume is turned down too low.
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is
not connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner’s guide for more information.
Bluetooth Controls
Pairing Information:
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle
is moving.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
call, or to cancel an operation.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle,
the system will say “Is connected” after the
connected phone.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linking to a Different Phone
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone
number.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing Name Tags
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the number to be re-entered.
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. After the system stores the phone number,
it responds with “Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say “No”
and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After the number is stored the
system returns to the main menu.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
Using the Digit Store Command
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
Using the Directory Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to
be stored is complete.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
Deleting Name Tags
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Using the Delete Command
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The delete command allows specific name tags to
be deleted.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• Dial
• Digit Dial
• Call
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
• Re-dial
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>”. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
• If the system does not recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Digit Dial Command
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Receiving a Call
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and dials
the number.
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by a
tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling, <name
tag>” and dials the number. If the name tag is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
name tag to be re-entered.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re-dial Command
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Mute a call
Three-Way Calling
1. Press b g . The system responds with
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
“Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Cancel Mute
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
Transferring a Call
the callers together.
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Ending a Call
Press c x to end a call.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
Muting a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
3-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone, press bg
for more than two seconds. The audio switches from the
cell phone to the vehicle.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Voice Pass-Thru
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
3-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
1. Press bg . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parental Control
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio the vehicle has. To start
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the
front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a
DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks,
two wireless headphones, and a remote control.
vehicle’s audio/DVD system.
The radio can be turned back on with a single press of
the power button, but the RSE system will remain
under Parental Control.
To turn Parental Control off, press and hold the radio
power button for more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously left and the padlock
icon disappears from the radio display.
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or
ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the
radio DVD display menu, or changing an ignition
position.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of the vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.
3-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes on.
If the light comes on but, there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator light
does not come on, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section
for more information. Switch the headphones to
Off when not in use.
Headphones
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out
of the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
The headphones automatically turns off after four hours
of continuous use.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones can
used to listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs,
any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the
auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature.
The wireless headphones have an On/Off button,
channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. Headphones should be worn with
headband over the top of the head for best audio
reception. The symbol L (Left) appears on the upper left
side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on
the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears on the upper
right side, above the ear pad and should be positioned
on the right ear.
3-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. Refer to your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
allow audio or video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors
or cables (not included) may be required to connect
the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
3-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video
screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD
player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the
remote control switches the video screen from the
DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device
more information.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change
any feature, do the following:
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system.
information.
1. Press the z (display) menu button on the remote
control.
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
radio’s auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature,
the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from
the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
2. Use the remote control menu n , q , p , o
(navigation) arrows and the r (enter) button
to use the setup menu.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
3-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and
press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very
bright light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter
to receive signals from the remote control. If the
remote control does not seem to be working, the
batteries might need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section. Objects blocking the
line of sight could also affect the function of the
remote control.
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on. This is normal, and
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control power button or eject the
disc to turn off the screen.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control O (power) button can be used to turn on
the video screen display and start the disc. The radio
can also turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s)
on page 3-88 for more information.
The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers
for the remote control. They are located at the rear
of the console.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by the warranty. Storage in
extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses
a code set of Toshiba®.
3-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current active
menu and return to the previous menu. This button
operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is
active.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, fast
reversing, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically
times out after seven to ten seconds if no other button
is pressed while the backlight is on.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause
it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD. This function could vary for
each disc.
While the DVD is playing, the DVD can be played
slowly by pressing the play/pause button then pressing
the fast forward button. The DVD continues playing
3-134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
in a slow play mode. Also, reverse can be played slowly
by pressing the play/pause button and then pressing
the fast reverse button. To cancel slow play mode, press
the play/pause button.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio tracks on
DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button might not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button
might not work while the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature while a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quickly reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play/pause button. To stop fast reversing
a DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse button.
This button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical inputs.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video,
press the play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding
a DVD audio or CD, release the fast forward button.
This button might not work while the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to select
chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press this
button before entering the number.
3-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Problem
Recommended Action
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and
the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure they are installed correctly using the
diagram on the inside of the remote control.
3. Replace the battery cover.
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
the DVD starts where I left DVD player resumes
off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the
remote control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
3-136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
The DVD display error message depends on the radio
that is in the vehicle. The video screen can display
one of the following:
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using a
cellular telephone in
the vehicle.
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when
there are disc load or eject problems.
Check that the
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc
is present when EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on
the radio.
3-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the music sources the front seat passengers are not
listening to (except on some radios where dual control is
allowed). For example, rear seat passengers can
control and listen to a CD through the headphones,
while the driver listens to the radio through the
front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control
of the volume for each set of headphones.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
The RSA functions can be used even while the main
radio is off. The front audio system will display the
headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear
from the display when it is off.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If the vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard
on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result.
Depending on the audio system, the rear speakers may
continue to play when the RSA audio is active through
the headphones.
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through
the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the
front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat
passengers to listen to and control any of the music
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control
3-138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if
the vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
©¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station or channels and stay
there. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold either seek arrow until the display
flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed
for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off.
While listening to a disc, press the left seek arrow to
go back to the start of the current track or chapter
(if more than ten seconds have played). Press the right
seek arrow to go the next track or chapter on the
disc. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
Volume: Turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the volume of the wired headphones. The left
knob controls the left headphones and the right knob
controls the right headphones.
3-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the
menu. Hold either seek arrow to perform a cursor left
or right on the menu.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station or channel set on the main radio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
While a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the CD or
DVD audio.
While a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer, press
this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs are
loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
While a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, Enter.
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.
x c (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track
if a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or
end a current call.
3-140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
Radio Reception
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth® systems press
and hold bg for longer than two seconds to interact with
information.
AM
SRCE (Source/Voice Recognition): Press to
switch between the radio (AM, FM, XM), CD, DVD
(if equipped), front auxiliary (if equipped), and rear
auxiliary (if equipped).
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
+ e – e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
FM Stereo
¨(Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
in AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨to go to the next track
or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot.
Press the ¨ if multiple discs are loaded to go to the
next disc while sourced to a CD player.
3-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Fixed Mast Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged as long as it is securely attached
to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent, straighten
it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
Cellular Phone Usage
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
3-142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet,
dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with
the traffic and allowing realistic following distances
eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-4.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied.
Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to
stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of
a second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of
a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-4.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on. This is normal.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
page 3-43.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is normal.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
StabiliTrak® System
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer
controlled system that assists the driver with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Brake Assist (Except With 4.3L V6 Engine)
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on
the intended path.
If this vehicle has StabiliTrak®, it also has a Brake
Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping
or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the stability system
hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power
brake system under conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in
an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake control module
increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle
until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations
or pedal movement during this time is normal and
the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as
the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal
is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates,
the cruise control automatically disengages. The
cruise control can be re-engaged when road conditions
information.
The StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when
the system is both on
and activated.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak
light along with one of the following messages will
be displayed on the Driver Information Center
(DIC): TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE
TRACTION CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned
off using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the
steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position to
the three o’clock position. If this clears the message(s),
the vehicle does not need servicing. If this does not
clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle off, wait
15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to reset the
system. If any of these messages still appear on the DIC,
the vehicle should be taken in for service. For more
information on the DIC messages, see Driver Information
The system may be heard or felt while it is working;
this is normal.
The traction control disable
button is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls.
The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off
by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if
both systems (traction control and StabiliTrak) were
previously on. To disable both TCS and StabiliTrak,
press and hold the button for five seconds.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCS and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and
releasing the StabiliTrak button if not automatically
shut off for any other reason.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
When TCS or StabiliTrak is turned off, the StabiliTrak
light and the appropriate message will be displayed
on the DIC to warn the driver. The vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when traction control is off, but
will not be able to use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for
more information.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while
driving. If traction control is turned off, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled.
In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.
When the traction control system has been turned off,
system noises may still be heard as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt
to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where
high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-30.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS and brake
warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are
displayed, the transfer case could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
messages are displayed.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability system is
automatically disabled, the StabiliTrak light comes on
and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on
the DIC. Both traction control and StabiliTrak are
automatically disabled in this condition.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration
may be heard. This is normal.
Steering
Power Steering
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
If cruise control is being used when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise
control will automatically disengage. Cruise control
may be reengaged when road conditions allow.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
Locking Rear Axle
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low,
this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
These problems can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as possible
from a collision. Then steer around the problem,
to the left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,
8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle
control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is
slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or
packed snow on the road to make a mirrored
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the
If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then an acceleration
skid is best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road
driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles
with 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies should not be driven
off-road except on a level, solid surface.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road
and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very
time you need special alertness and driving skills, your
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected by
even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a
serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Before You Go Off-Roading
• Have all necessary maintenance and service
work done.
• Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
where they should be, and that the spare tire is fully
inflated.
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
When off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked,
curves are not banked, and there are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
• Be sure to read all the information about
four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
• Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached.
• Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving or check with law enforcement
people in the area.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure
to operate the vehicle correctly off-road could result in
loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover.
• Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will be
on private land.
Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
suggestions to help make off-road driving safer
and more enjoyable.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
fascia lower air dam. The air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the
front fascia.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
{ CAUTION:
To remove the air dam:
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
2. With a flat-blade tool, disengage the snaps.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it
is free.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in
the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front fascia lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine.
Always be sure to replace the front fascia air
dam when you are finished off-road driving.
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall the air dam:
1. Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward
to engage the snaps.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward
as you can.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
• Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are
not tossed around.
You will find other important information under Loading
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see
if there are any blocked or closed roads.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if
you get stuck but you will want to know how to use
it properly.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving and obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.
This includes wheel-spinning, breaking down
trees, or unnecessary driving through streams or
over soft ground.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
{ CAUTION:
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills.
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and quick
changes in direction can easily throw you out of
position. This could cause you to lose control and
crash. So, whether you are driving on or off the
road, you and your passengers should wear
safety belts.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes
need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected
obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire
or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and body
to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
• You approach things faster and have less time
to react.
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
• There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• The vehicle has more bounce when driving over
obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle’s
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer
braking distances can occur.
• More braking distance is needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road
signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use good
judgment about what is safe and what is not.
Driving on Hills
Some things to consider:
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what the vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm
grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface
features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
{ CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the
wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle
as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard
to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be
a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you might not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
speed. Not using more power than needed can
avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
Consider this as you approach a hill:
{ CAUTION:
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill:
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in R (Reverse).
• Use headlamps even during the day to make the
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
• If the engine has stopped running, you need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
{ CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle.
You could be seriously injured or killed. As you
near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
• While backing down the hill, put your left hand on the
steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position so you can
tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as
you back down. It is best to back down the hill with
the wheels straight rather than in the left or right
direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
{ CAUTION:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward
momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can
roll backward very quickly and could go out
of control.
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). This is because the Neutral position on
the transfer case overrides the transmission.
You or someone else could be injured. If you are
going to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake
and shift the transmission to P (Park). But do not
shift the transfer case to Neutral.
• Never try to turn around if about to stall when going
up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall the
vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll over.
If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight down
the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your
transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine.
Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the
uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case
to Neutral when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in
some gear.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Things not to do when driving down a hill:
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep
the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so
engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to
do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the vehicle
under control at all times.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will
have to do all the work and could overheat and fade.
Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and
apply the parking brake.
{ CAUTION:
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause
loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the
brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel,
muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the
tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle
slips sideways, it can hit something that will
trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
Driving Across an Incline
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of
a hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the
incline, consider the following:
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock
with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels
drop into a rut or depression, the vehicle can
tilt even more.
{ CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try to
drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
across the incline does not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and
prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent
this is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the
surface is like before driving it.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down
might be too steep to drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to
the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when driving across
an incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
Stalling on an Incline
When driving on sand, wheel traction changes.
On loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or
sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand.
This affects steering, accelerating, and braking.
Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers.
{ CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle
does get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can
cause it to slide out of control.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure
you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side,
even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out
on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over,
you will be right in its path.
{ CAUTION:
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice.
Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you
and your passengers could drown. Drive your
vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do
not get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick,
turning is more difficult, and braking distances are
longer.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system
and the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if
you get the tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under
water, you will never be able to start the engine.
When going through water, remember that when the
brakes get wet, it might take longer to stop. See Driving
Driving in Water
{ CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it is
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it.
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs,
axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other
vehicle parts.
The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types of driving
conditions and avoid driving through large puddles
and deep-standing or flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
{ CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
Have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-64.
Other driving tips include:
• Turn off cruise control.
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road
ahead and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{ CAUTION:
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
about driving off-road.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7. To get help and keep everyone in the
vehicle safe:
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
When driving through deep snow, turn off the traction
control part of the StabiliTrak® System to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and
to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel High. For vehicles with
StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control part of the
system off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the
accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse
directions causes a rocking motion that could free
the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a
few tries, it might need to be towed out. Recovery hooks
can be used, if the vehicle has them. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-45.
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recovery Hooks
{ CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
break off and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change the
way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 5-73.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules and trailering tips.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Total
1,000 lbs
Item
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Total
1,000 lbs
A
A
Weight for Example 1 = (453 kg)
Weight for Example 2 = (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Subtract Occupant
B
C
Weight 150 lbs
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
Weight 150 lbs
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Total
1,000 lbs
A
Weight for Example 3 = (453 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label
shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo.
Subtract Occupant
1,000 lbs
B
C
Weight 200 lbs
(453 kg)
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading
information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also contains important
information about your Front Axle Reserve
Capacity. See “What is front axle reserve capacity,
and how do I calculate it?” under Adding a
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck could
shift forward and come into the passenger
area, injuring you and others. If you put
things in the bed of your truck, you should
make sure they are properly secured.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is
a crash, they will keep going.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-Tiered Loading
Depending on the model of your pick-up, you can
create an upper load platform by positioning
two or four 2 inches (5 cm) by 6 inches (15 cm)
wooden planks across the width of the pickup box.
The planks must be inserted in the pickup box
depressions. The length of the planks must allow
for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface
on each end of the plank.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the
load is securely tied down to prevent it from
shifting. The load’s center of gravity should be
positioned in a zone over the rear axle. The zone
is located in the area between the front of each
wheel well and the rear of each wheel well.
The center of gravity height must not extend above
the top of the pickup box flareboard.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s
taillamp area must be properly marked according
to local laws and regulations.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving“ under Off-Road
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Equipment
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry
inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle
before you buy and install the new equipment.
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here are
some things you will need to know:
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow
plow prep package, adding a plow can damage your
vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by
warranty. Unless your vehicle was built to carry
a snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle. If your
vehicle has the snow plow prep package, called
RPO VYU, then the payload your vehicle can carry
will be reduced when a snow plow is installed.
Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front or
rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
are exceeded.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
* Equipment
Maximum Weight
Ladder Rack and
Cargo
750 lbs (340 kg)
Cross Toolbox and
Cargo
400 lbs (181 kg)
Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep
package, called RPO VYU. If your vehicle has this
option, you can add a plow to it, provided certain
weights, such as the weights on the vehicle’s axles and
the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), are not exceeded.
Side Boxes and
Cargo
250 lbs per side
(113 kg per side)
* The combined weight for all rail-mounted
equipment should not exceed 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many
things, such as:
Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow
plow on your vehicle:
• The options your vehicle came with, and the weight
of those options.
• Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles
does not exceed the axle rating for each.
• The weight and number of passengers you intend
to carry.
• For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers must
be carried, appropriate counter ballast must be
installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast must
be properly secured so it will not move during driving.
• The weight of items you have added to your vehicle,
like a tool box or truck cap.
• Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s
recommendations regarding rear ballast.
Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper
front and rear weight distribution ratio, even though
the actual weight at the front axle may be less than
the front axle rating.
• The total weight of any additional cargo you intend
to carry.
Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow.
The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the cab
should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg). This means that you
may only be able to carry one passenger. But, even this
may be too much if you have got other equipment already
adding to the weight of your vehicle.
• The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist
you in determining the amount of rear ballast
required, to help make sure your snowplow/vehicle
combination does not exceed the GVW rating, the
front and rear axle ratings, and the front and rear
weight distribution ratio.
• The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between
your front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and
the front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and
passengers. Basically, it is the amount of weight you
can add to your front axle before reaching your
front GAWR.
In order to calculate the amount of weight any front
accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front
axle, use the following formula:
The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be
found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
label, as shown.
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is
adding to the front axle.
United States
Canada
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the
front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow
actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front
axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm)
in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft
(305 cm), then:
W = 700 lb (318 kg)
A = 4 ft (122 cm)
{ CAUTION:
On some vehicles that have certain front mounted
equipment, such as a snow plow, it may be
possible to load the front axle to the front gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) but not have enough
weight on the rear axle to have proper braking
performance. If your brakes can not work properly,
you could have a crash. To help your brakes work
properly when a snow plow is installed, always
follow the snow plow manufacturer or installer’s
recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a
proper front and rear weight distribution ratio, even
though the actual front weight may be less than
the front GAWR, and the total vehicle weight is
less than the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
Maintaining a proper front and rear weight
distribution ratio is necessary to provide proper
braking performance.
W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 =
980 lbs (445 kg)
So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity is more
than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plow
without exceeding the front GAWR.
You can add heavier equipment on the front of the
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer
passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo towards
the rear. This has the effect of reducing the load on
the front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never
be exceeded.
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the difference between
your GVWR and the weight of your truck with full fuel
and passengers. It is the amount of weight you can
add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are
intended as a guide when selecting the amount of
equipment or cargo your truck can carry. If you
are unsure of your vehicle’s front, rear, or total
weight, go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.
Your dealer/retailer can also help you with this.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
A vehicle specific Truck-Camper Loading
information label is attached to the inside of your
vehicle’s glove box. This label will tell you if
your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how
much of a load your vehicle can carry, and how to
correctly spread out the load. Also, it will help
you match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle.
The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can
be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
label as shown previously.
When you carry a slide-in camper, the total
cargo load of your vehicle is the weight of the
camper, plus the following:
See your dealer/retailer for additional advice and
information about using a snow plow on your vehicle.
• Everything else added to the camper after it
left the factory
Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
• Everything in the camper
• All the people inside
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package
also have an emergency roof lamp provision package,
RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is
provided above the overhead console. See Auxiliary
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry.
It does not include the weight of the people inside.
But, you can figure about 150 lbs (68 kg) for
each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Information
label in the glove box for dimensions A and B
as shown in the following illustration.
Here is an example of proper truck and camper
match:
A. Camper Center of Gravity
B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement
purposes. The recommended location for the cargo
center of gravity is at point C for the CWR. It is the
point where the mass of a body is concentrated
and, if suspended at that point, would balance the
front and rear.
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper,
the total cargo load of the truck consists of the
manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight
of installed additional camper equipment not
included in the manufacturer’s camper weight
figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight
of passengers in the camper. The total cargo
load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight
rating and the camper’s center of gravity (A)
should fall within the truck’s recommended center
of gravity zone (B) when installed.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You must weigh any accessories or other
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts
that could affect the balance of your vehicle.
When the truck-camper is loaded, drive to a scale
and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle
loads should not exceed either of the gross
axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total axle loads
should not exceed your vehicle’s gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.
See “Certification/Tire Label” under Loading the
exceeded, move or remove items to bring all
weights below the ratings.
equipment that you add to your vehicle. Then,
subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extra
weight may shorten the center of gravity zone of
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
If your slide-in camper and its load weighs
less than the CWR, the center of gravity zone
for your vehicle may be larger.
Your dealer can help you make a good
vehicle-camper match and help you determine
the CWR.
After you have loaded your vehicle and camper,
drive to a weigh station and weigh the front
and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the
loads on the axles. The loads on the front and rear
axles should not be more than either of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not be more than the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).
When you install and load your slide-in camper,
check the manufacturer’s instructions.
If you want more information on curb weights,
cargo weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the
correct center of gravity zone for your vehicle,
your dealer can help you. Just ask for a copy of
“Consumer Information, Truck-Camper Loading.”
Open the driver’s door and look at the
Certification/Tire label to find out your vehicle’s
GAWRs and GVWR.
If your vehicle has gone over the weight ratings,
move or take out some things until all the
weight falls below the ratings.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
Recreational Vehicle Towing
We are aware that some vehicle owners might consider
having the pickup box removed and a commercial or
recreational body installed. Owners should be aware
that, as manufactured, there are differences between a
chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which
could affect vehicle safety. The components necessary
to adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with a specialized
body should be installed by the body builder.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle:
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground.
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park).
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake.
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
{ CAUTION:
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
for the proper procedure to select the Neutral
position for the vehicle.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the
key — the steering wheel will still turn.
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
to take the vehicle out of the Neutral position.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, the vehicle must
be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Rear
Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this
section for more information.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
5. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
for the proper procedure to select the neutral
position for the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front:
8. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 2-50.
Rear Towing
(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
on page 2-50.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
Towing a Trailer
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual for more information.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
{ CAUTION:
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well or even
at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
for the proper procedure to select the neutral
position for the vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• And the weight on the vehicle’s tires
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and
the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for
more information.
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle
can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Weights listed apply for conventional trailers and
fifth-wheel trailers unless otherwise noted.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c)
3.23
4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)
5,300 lbs (2 404 kg)
5,200 lbs (2 359 kg)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
8,200 lbs (3 720 kg)
6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
4.3L V6 (c)
3.73
3.23
3.73
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.42
4.8L V8 (c)
4.8L V8
5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic
5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic
5.3L LMG V8 6 Speed Automatic
5.3L LY5 V8 6 Speed Automatic
5.3L LMG V8 6 Speed Automatic,
K5L HD Cooling Pkg
3.42
3.42
9,100 lbs (4 128 kg)
9,200 lbs (4 173 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5.3L LY5 V8 6 Speed Automatic,
K5L HD Cooling Pkg
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c)
3.23
4,400 lbs (1 996 kg)
4,900 lbs (2 223 kg)
4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
4.3L V6 (c)
3.73
3.23
3.73
3.42
3.73
3.42
4.8L V8 (c)
4.8L V8
5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic
5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic
5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic
5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic, K5L
HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel
Trailer
3.42
3.42
9,100 lbs (4 128 kg)
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic, K5L
HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional
Trailer
6.0L V8
3.42
3.42
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
8,700 lbs (3 946 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling
3.42
3.73
3.73
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,700 lbs (4 853 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
6.0L V8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Short Box (c)
4.3L V6
3.23
3.73
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.42
4,400 lbs (1 996 kg)
4,900 lbs (2 223 kg)
5,800 lbs (2 631 kg)
6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)
6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
4.3L V6
4.8L V8
4.8L V8
5.3L V8
5.3L V8
6.0L V8
6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)
4.8L V8
3.23
3.73
3.42
3.42
3.42
3.42
4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
4.8L V8
5.3L V8
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.0L, 6.2L V8
6.0L, 6.2L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.0L, 6.2L V8 NHT Max
Trailering Pkg
3.73
10,600 lbs (4 808 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c)
4.3L V6 (c)
3.23
3.73
4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)
5,200 lbs (2 359 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
4.8L V8 (c)
Axle Ratio
3.23
Maximum Trailer Weight
5,100 lbs (2 313 kg)
7,100 lbs (3 221 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
GCWR (a)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
4.8L V8
3.73
5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic
5.3L V8 4 Speed Automatic
5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic
3.42
3.73
3.42
5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic, K5L
HD Cooling Pkg — Fifth-Wheel
Trailer
3.42
3.42
8,700 lbs (3 946 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic, K5L
HD Cooling Pkg — Conventional
Trailer
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)
5.3L V8 4 Speed
Automatic — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.73
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
5.3L V8 4 Speed
3.73
3.42
7,600 lbs (3 447 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
Automatic — Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8 6 Speed Automatic
5.3L V8 6 Speed
Automatic, K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
8,700 lbs (3 946 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3L V8 6 Speed
Automatic, K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c)
4.8L V8 (c)
5.3L V8
3.73
5,100 lbs (2 313 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
3.42
3.42
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8
3.73
4.10
4.10
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg)
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5.3L V8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8 — Conventional Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)
4.8L V8 (c)
5.3L V8 (c)
3.42
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
5,900 lbs (2 676 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
3.42
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
3.42
5.3L V8
3.73
4.10
3.42
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
5.3L V8
6.0L V8 (c)
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
8,400 lbs (3 810 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling
3.42
3.73
3.73
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
6.0L V8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Short Box (c)
4.8L V8
3.42
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.42
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
4.8L V8
5.3L V8
5.3L V8
6.0L V8
6.0L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)
4.8L V8
3.42
3.42
3.42
3.42
3.42
5,400 lbs (2 449 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3L V8
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.0L, 6.2L V8
6.0L, 6.2L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
6.0L V8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.73
9,900 lbs (4 491 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
6.0L, 6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
3.73
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c)
4.8L V8 (c)
5.3L V8
3.73
3.42
3.42
4,900 lbs (2 223 kg)
5,800 lbs (2 631 kg)
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8 — Conventional Trailer
5.3L V8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8 — Conventional Trailer
3.73
3.73
4.10
4.10
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
8,800 lbs (3 992 kg)
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)
5.3L V8 (c)
3.42
3.42
5,700 lbs (2 586 kg)
7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
3.42
9,200 lbs (4 173 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
5.3L LMG V8
5.3L LY5 V8
Axle Ratio
3.73
Maximum Trailer Weight
7,600 lbs (3 447 kg)
GCWR (a)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
3.73
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)
12,700 lbs (5 761 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
9,900 lbs (4 491 kg)
12,400 lbs (5 625 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
9,900 lbs (4 491 kg)
12,400 lbs (5 625 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
12,300 lbs (5 579 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)
12,700 lbs (5 761 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
12,300 lbs (5 579 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8
3.73
4.10
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
12,100 lbs (5 489 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3500 Series 2WD Extended Cab (e)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
9,900 lbs (4 491 kg)
12,400 lbs (5 625 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3.73
4.10
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab (e)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3.73
4.10
9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)
11,800 lbs (5 352 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3500 Series 4WD Regular Cab (e)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3.73
4.10
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
3500 Series 4WD Extended Cab (e)
3.73
4.10
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
12,100 lbs (5 489 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
9,200 lbs (4 173 kg)
11,700 lbs (5 307 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab (e)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
11,900 lbs (5 398 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3.73
4.10
9,100 lbs (4 128 kg)
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
(b) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
maximum.
(c) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
(d) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
(e) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) maximum.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2500 series, and up to a maximum of 750 lbs (340 kg)
for the 2500 HD or 3500 series with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
maximum of 1,000 lbs (453 kg) for the 1500 series
and up to a maximum of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the 2500,
2500 HD or 3500 series with a weight distributing hitch.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of
options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle,
it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry,
which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can
tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added
to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that
weight, too. See for more information about the vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be
15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to the maximum
amount specified in the trailering chart for the vehicle.
See “Weight of the Trailer”, and “Fifth-Wheel and
Gooseneck Trailering” in this section.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) for the 1500 or
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consider the following example:
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you might
think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the
rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear axle
now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) can
be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be
850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as
well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total
loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it
is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the
vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the drivers door
information. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for
the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch,
make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before
applying the weight distribution spring bars.
A: Body to Ground Distance
B: Front of Vehicle
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is
ample room when turning to avoid contact between the
trailer and the bumper.
Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be
15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to the maximum
amount specified in the trailering chart for the vehicle.
See “Weight of the Trailer” in this section for more
information.
If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than
5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper
size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when driving. Always use
a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than
The hitch should be located in the pickup bed so that its
centerline is over or slightly in front of the rear axle.
Take care that it is not so far forward that it will contact
the back of the cab in sharp turns. This is especially
important for short box pickups. Trailer pin box
these limits. Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
extensions and sliding fifth wheel hitch assemblies can
help this condition. There should be at least six inches
of clearance between the top of the pickup box and the
bottom of the trailer shelf that extends over the box.
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering
Fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers can be used with
many pickup models. These trailers place a larger
percentage of the weight (kingpin weight) on the tow
vehicle than conventional trailers. Make sure this weight
does not cause the vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.
Make sure the hitch is attached to the tow vehicle frame
rails. Do not use the pickup box for support.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Chains
Tow/Haul Mode
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. If the trailer
being towed weighs up to 5,000 lbs (2 271 kg) with a
factory-installed step bumper, safety chains may be
attached to the attaching points on the bumper.
If the trailer being towed weighs up to the vehicle’s
trailer rating limit, safety chains may be attached to the
attaching point on the hitch platform. Always leave
just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Pressing this button at
the end of the shift lever
turns on and off the
tow/haul mode.
This indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on when the
tow/haul mode is on.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode
on page 2-34 for more information.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
See “Weight of the Trailer” later in the section. Tow/Haul
is most useful under the following driving conditions:
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2,000 lbs
(900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
If the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, the
trailer cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake
system.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in busy parking lots where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.
The trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when
the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from the vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
will not work well or at all.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid
to the rear brakes. Use only steel brake tubing to
make the tap.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak
systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system
may not be fully functional or may not function at
all. Make sure all of these systems are fully operational
to ensure full functionality of the ITBC system.
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System
The vehicle may have an
Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system for
electric trailer brakes.
The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle’s
electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn
off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional
only when the ignition is in ON or in RUN.
The ITBC system can only be used with trailers with
electric brakes.
This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control
Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System. The power output to the trailer brakes
is based on the amount of brake pressure being
applied by the vehicle’s brake system. This available
power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a
wide range of trailering situations.
{ CAUTION:
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBC system may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase
in stopping distance or trailer instability which
could result in personal injury or damage to the
vehicle, trailer, or other property. An aftermarket
controller may be available for use with trailers
The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle’s brake,
anti-lock brake and StabiliTrak (if equipped) systems.
In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle’s anti-lock
brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate, power sent
to the trailer’s brakes will be automatically adjusted to
minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply
that the trailer has the StabiliTrak system.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailer Brake Control Panel
CAUTION: (Continued)
with surge, air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the type of brakes
on the trailer and the availability of controllers,
check with your trailer manufacturer or
dealer/retailer.
When trailering, make sure of the following:
• The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are
equipped with electric brakes.
• All applicable local and federal laws and regulations
are followed.
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
• All electrical and mechanical connections to the
trailer are made correctly.
The ITBC system has a control panel located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column.
The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of
output, referred to as trailer gain, available to the electric
trailer brakes and allows manual application of the trailer
brakes. The Trailer Brake Control Panel is used along
with the Trailer Brake Display Page on the DIC to adjust
and display power output to the trailer brakes.
• The trailer’s brakes are in proper working condition.
• The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for
the towing condition.
The ITBC system is a factory installed item.
Out-of-factory installation of this system should not be
attempted. GM is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the system resulting from out-of-factory
installation.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by
performing any of the following actions:
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle’s
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
• Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the
odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information
button (if equipped).
The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting, power
output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer connection and
system operational status.
• Pressing a Trailer Gain button – If the Trailer Brake
Display Page is not currently displayed, pressing a
Trailer Gain button will first recall the current
Trailer Gain setting. After the Trailer Brake Display
Page is displayed, each press and release of
the gain buttons will then cause the Trailer Gain
setting to change.
• Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever
• Connecting a trailer equipped with electric trailer
brakes
All DIC warning and service messages must first be
acknowledged by the driver by pressing the odometer
trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button
(if equipped) before the Trailer Brake Display Page can
be displayed and Trailer Gain can be adjusted.
TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayed anytime the
Trailer Brake Display Page is active. This setting
can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer
connected or disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Gain,
press one of the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons
located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press and
A. Trailer Gain Setting
B. Power Output to Trailer Brakes
C. No trailer with electric brakes connected or fault
present
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
hold a gain button to cause the Trailer Gain to
continuously adjust. To turn the output to the trailer off,
adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0.0 (zero).
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located on the
Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to apply the
trailer’s electric brakes independent of the vehicle’s
brakes. This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure to properly adjust the power output to the
trailer brakes. Sliding the lever to the left will apply only
the trailer brakes. The power output to the trailer is
indicated in the Trailer Brake Display Page in the DIC.
If the vehicle’s service brakes are applied while
using the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever, the trailer
output power will be the greater of the two.
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. To properly
adjust trailer gain, see the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure later in this section.
TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time a trailer
with electric brakes is connected. Output to the electric
brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking
present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is
displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each gain setting.
The Trailer Output will indicate “- - - - - -“ on the Trailer
Brake Display Page whenever the following occur:
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
• No trailer is connected.
• A trailer without electric brakes is connected
(no DIC message is displayed).
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering
condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle loading,
trailer loading or road surface conditions change.
• A trailer with electric brakes has become
disconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the
best trailer stopping performance. A trailer that is
over-gained may result in locked trailer brakes.
• There is a fault present in the wiring to the electric
trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
• There is a fault in the ITBC system (a SERVICE
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also
be displayed in the DIC).
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A trailer that is under-gained may result in not enough
trailer braking. Both of these conditions may result
in poorer stopping and stability of the vehicle and trailer.
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gain adjustment
(+ /–) buttons on the Trailer Brake Control Panel.
5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level
road surface representative of the towing condition
and free of traffic at about 20 to 25 mph (32 to
40 km/h) and fully apply the Manual Trailer Brake
Apply lever.
Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer
Gain for each towing condition:
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working
condition.
Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than 20 to
25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) may result in an incorrect
gain setting.
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer to the vehicle and
make all necessary mechanical and electrical
for more information.
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the point of
trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel
squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks.
3. After the electrical connection is made to a trailer
equipped with electric brakes:
Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing
a heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the
Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the
towing condition.
• A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be
briefly displayed on the DIC display.
• The Trailer Brake Display Page will appear on
the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT.
7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading,
trailer loading or road surface conditions change
or if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time while
towing.
• In the Trailer Output display on the DIC,
“- - - - - -“ will disappear if there is no error
present. Connecting a trailer without electric
brakes will not clear the six dashed lines.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the
electric trailer brakes. This message will continue as
long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer
wiring. This message will also turn off if the driver
acknowledges this message off.
Other ITBC Related DIC Messages
In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and
ITBC system status is displayed in the DIC.
TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will be
briefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakes is
first connected to the vehicle. This message will
automatically turn off in about ten seconds. The driver
can also acknowledge this message before it
automatically turns off.
To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side
or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the
vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be
displayed if:
3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the ignition back
to RUN.
1. The ITBC system first determines connection to a
trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer
harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message
re-appears, the electrical fault is on the vehicle side.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stationary, this message will automatically turn off in
about thirty seconds. This message will also turn
off if the driver acknowledges this message off or if
the trailer harness is re-connected.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only
re-appears when connecting the trailer wiring
harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on the
trailer side.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving,
this message will continue until the ignition is
turned off. This message will also turn off if the
driver acknowledges this message off or if the trailer
harness is re-connected.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This message
will be displayed when there is a problem with the
ITBC system. If this message persists over multiple
ignition cycles there is a problem with the ITBC system.
Take the vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to have
the ITBC system diagnosed and repaired.
Driving with a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is displayed while
driving the vehicle, power is no longer available to
the trailer brakes. When traffic conditions allow, carefully
pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn
the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the
trailer and turn the ignition back on. If either of these
messages continues, either the vehicle or trailer
needs service.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
• Have the exhaust system inspected for
leaks and make necessary repairs before
starting a trip.
• Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
rear-most window open.
An authorized GM dealer may be able to diagnose
and repair problems with the trailer. However, any
diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under
the vehicle warranty. Please contact your trailer
dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer
warranty information.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide,
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
While towing a trailer or when exposed to long periods
of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may become
very warm. Avoid putting items in the truck bed
that might be affected by high ambient temperatures.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Turns
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission
is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let
the engine run while parked, preferably on level ground,
with the automatic transmission in P (Park) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat
page 5-34.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
N (Neutral).
Parking on Hills
{ CAUTION:
6. Release the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
Always put the shift lever fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
If the transfer case on a four-wheel-drive vehicle is
in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even
if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral).
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Trailer Wiring Harness
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• Start the engine
The vehicle is equipped with one of the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer or hauling a slide-in
camper.
• Shift into a gear
Basic Trailer Wiring
• Release the parking brake
All regular, extended cab and crew cab pickups have a
seven-wire trailer towing harness.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
For vehicles not equipped with heavy duty trailering, the
harness is secured to the vehicle’s frame behind the
spare tire mount. The harness requires the installation of
a trailer connector, which is available through your
dealer/retailer.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule
or Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these
before and during the trip.
If towing a light-duty trailer with a standard four-way
round pin connector, an adapter is available from your
dealer/retailer.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service center. The fuse
and wire for the ITBC is factory installed and connected
if the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC. The fuse for
the battery feed is not required if the vehicle has
an auxiliary battery. If the vehicle does not have an
auxiliary battery, have your dealer/retailer or authorized
service center install the required fuse.
Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness
Package
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the
tow/haul mode button located at the end of the
shift lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage
and properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light
for tow/haul mode, turn on the headlamps as a
second way to boost the vehicle system and charge
the battery.
For vehicles equipped with heavy duty trailering, the
harness is connected to a bracket on the hitch platform.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed*
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring Package
The seven-wire camper harness is located under the
front edge of the pickup box on the drivers side of
the vehicle, attached to the frame bracket. A connector
must be added to the wiring harness which connects
to the camper.
The harness contains the following camper/trailer
circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed
If the vehicle is equipped with the “Heavy-Duty
Trailering” option, please refer to “Heavy-Duty Trailer
Wiring Package” earlier in this section.
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
When the camper-wiring harness is ordered without the
heavy-duty trailering package, an eight-wire harness
with a seven-pin connector is located at the rear of the
vehicle and is tied to the vehicle’s frame.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions
that are included with any electrical equipment that
is installed.
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as
part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions
are for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel
contains blunt cut wires behind the steering column
for the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the
following wires:
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not use equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating for the auxiliary battery provision.
• Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector
• Red/Black: Battery
Trailer Recommendations
Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating
(CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of the load
the vehicle can carry. It does not include the weight of
the people inside, but you can figure about 150 lbs.
(68 kg) for each passenger. The total cargo load must
not be more than the vehicles CWR.
• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
• White: Ground
It should be installed by your dealer/retailer or a
qualified service center.
If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts
exist, but are not connected further in the harness. If an
aftermarket trailer brake controller is installed, the ITBC
must be disconnected. Do not power both ITBC and
aftermarket controllers to control the trailer brakes at the
same time.
Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached, so the
GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded. If using a
weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
The best performance is obtained by correctly spreading
out the weight of the load and choosing the correct
hitch and trailer brakes.
Auxiliary Battery
The auxiliary battery provision can be used to supply
electrical power to additional equipment that may be
added, such as a slide-in camper. If the vehicle has this
provision, this relay will be located on the drivers side of
the vehicle, next to the underhood electrical center.
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-58
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
If this vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0),
the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), or the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code 2), you can use either unleaded gasoline
or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
gasoline engines, use only unleaded gasoline. See
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
For all vehicles except those with the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code 2), use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is
less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking noise
when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Fuel
For diesel engine vehicles, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this.
Gasoline
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
additional information.
California Fuel
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0), the
5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), or the 6.2L V8 engine
(Code 2), you can use either unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See
unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane
on page 5-6.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0), the
5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), or the 6.2L V8 engine (Code 2)
can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use
of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol
in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do
have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content.
Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater
than 85%.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85
fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system. Do not
add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Specification D 5798. By definition, this means that
fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between
70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that
do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability
and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
come on.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according to
ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble starting
on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly
formulated for your climate. If this happens, switching to
gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve
starting. For good starting and heater efficiency below
32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain
no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate
repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do switch
fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately
after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the
vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85
than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see the
DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has
E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and
state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
{ CAUTION:
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly
for more information.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab model, and
it runs out of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first to
ensure a quick restart.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-45.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on
the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the left of
the brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the
secondary hood release. This is located under the
hood, near the center of the grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then bring the hood from full open to
within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed position,
pause, then push the front center of the hood with a
swift, firm motion to fully close the hood.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0L and 6.2L similar), this is what you will see:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-39.
page 5-44.
Engine Oil
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
For diesel engine vehicles, see “Engine Oil” in the
DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the
Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid
page 5-24.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View).
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
page 5-28.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
When to Add Engine Oil
engine oil fill cap.
I
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils meeting these
Look for three things:
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls
below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic
oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Always use an oil that meets the required specification,
GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for
more information.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on.
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message coming on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If
the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle
must be in P (Park) to access this display. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Pickup Models”
under “Engine Air Cleaner/Filter” in the DURAMAX®
Diesel Supplement for the correct inspection and
replacement procedures.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,
or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
information. If driving on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 7. When the engine air cleaner/filter is removed,
lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the engine
air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(4-Speed Transmission)
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in 3 (Third) until the engine temperature gage moves
and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too
little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in P (Park).
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in P (Park).
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Locate the transmission
dipstick handle with this
graphic which is located
at the rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
for more information on location.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check. Be
sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If
readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer/retailer.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission)
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is
hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid
level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring
the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does
not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L).
Do not overfill.
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid
level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak
or overheating the transmission. If you suspect a small
leak, then use the following checking procedures to check
the fluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then it
may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer/
retailer service department and have it repaired before
driving the vehicle further.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described
under “How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid,”
earlier in this section.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down
to lock the dipstick in place.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, move the shift
lever back to P (Park).
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel
button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS
TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle as
follows:
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and
perform the appropriate check procedure. If the
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool,
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is reached.
1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level
surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
P (Park).
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if
the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely
until a hot check procedure can be made. The hot check
procedure is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure at the first
opportunity. Use this cold check procedure to check fluid
level when the transmission temperature is between
80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).
1. Locate the transmission
dipstick at the
rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of
the vehicle.
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band, add
only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level
into the COLD band. It does not take much fluid,
generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.
for more information.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after
the transmission reaches a normal operating
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
temperature between 160°F to 200°F (71°C to 93°C).
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle down
to lock the dipstick in place.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the first
opportunity in order to verify the cold check. The fluid
level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is
important to ensure the transmission temperature is
within range.
1. Locate the transmission
dipstick at the
rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of
the vehicle.
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch
band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within the
HOT band, and the transmission temperature is
between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or
drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the
HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough
fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not
take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L).
Do not overfill.
for more information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle down
to lock the dipstick in place.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid
level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Cooling System
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
5.3L Engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0L and 6.2L Similar)
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan can start even when
the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always
keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
engine cooling fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
page 6-15 for more information.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.
more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak in the
cooling system.
If the vehicle has a low coolant sensor and the LOW
COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and stays on,
it means you are low on engine coolant. See “LOW
COOLANT LEVEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-66.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank for Gasoline Engines
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Cooling System”
in the DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for the proper
coolant fill procedure.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{ CAUTION:
1. Remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure Steps 1 through 6.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the FULL COLD mark.
You will find a coolant temperature gage on the vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until the engine coolant
temperature gage indicates approximately
195°F (90°C).
In addition, you will find ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE,
and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED messages in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
{ CAUTION:
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running.
If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and
have the vehicle serviced.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged. The
costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
on page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or
the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along
with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
3. If you are stopped in a traffic jam, apply the brake,
shift to N (Neutral); otherwise, shift to the highest
gear while driving — D (Drive) or 3 (Third).
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
five minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Engine Fan Noise
If the vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, when the
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air
to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions,
the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully
engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan
noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or
high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as
the clutch more fully engages, so you may hear an
increase in fan noise. This is normal and should not be
mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra
shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly.
The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not
required and the clutch disengages.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In
this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows the vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-15.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
If the vehicle has electric cooling fans, you may hear the
fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving.
The fans may turn off if no cooling is required. Under
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside
temperatures, or if you are operating the air conditioning
system, the fans may change to high speed and you
may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and
indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly.
The fans will change to low speed when additional
cooling is no longer required.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed
page 6-15.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing
in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC
that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message
is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
message displays, you will need to add washer fluid to
the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system. See
“Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Brake Fluid
{ CAUTION:
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
the brake hydraulic system can damage brake
hydraulic system parts so badly that they will
have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,
except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise is heard,
have the rear brake linings inspected immediately. Rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each time
the tires are removed for rotation or changing. Drum
brakes have an inspection hole to inspect lining wear
during scheduled maintenance. When the front brake
pads are replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
{ CAUTION:
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the brakes adjust for wear.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Battery
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery (or batteries).
When it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer
for one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
If the vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
2. If you have a vehicle with a diesel engine with two
batteries, you should know before you begin that,
especially in cold weather, you may not be able to
get enough power from a single battery in another
vehicle to start your diesel engine. If your vehicle has
more than one battery, use the battery that is closer
to the starter — this will reduce electrical resistance.
This is located on the passenger side, in the rear of
the engine compartment.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause an unwanted
ground connection. You would not be able to start
your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
4. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear, not in Neutral.
5. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
The positive (+) terminal, is located under a red
plastic cover at the positive battery post. To uncover
the positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
The remote negative (-) terminal is a stud located
on the right front passenger side of the engine,
where the negative battery cable attaches.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery.
{ CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L,
6.0L and 6.2L similar)
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
11. Start the vehicle with the good battery and run the
engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the
fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid
has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained
back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading taken
five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear
to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been
stationary for an hour or two. Remember that the rear
axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading.
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
How to Check Lubricant
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover, to its original
position.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual
noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it
inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain level.
When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in
the readings can be caused by factory fill differences
between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume.
2500HD with 6.0L and 6.2L
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For all 6.0L and 6.2L 2500HD Series applications,
the proper level is from 0 to 0.5 inches (0 mm to
13 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
• For all 6.6L DURAMAX DIESEL 2500HD Series
applications and all 3500 Series applications,
the proper level is from 0.6 inches to 0.8 inches
(17 mm to 21 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid
to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
All Other Series and Engines
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles.
• For all 4.3L, 4.8L and 5.3L 1500 Series applications,
the proper level is 0.04 inches to 0.75 inches
(1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom of the filler
hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough
fluid to reach the proper level.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
• For all 6.0L and 6.2L 1500 Series applications,
the proper level is from 0.6 inches to 1.6 inches
(15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid
to reach the proper level.
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
Manual Shift Transfer Case
Electric Shift Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Active Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you will need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten
the plug.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1500 Series
All except 1500 Series
A: Fill Plug
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
B: Drain Plug
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof:
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person,
other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device or element of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of
noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
Noise Control System
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
Tampering with Noise Control
System Prohibited
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
The following information relates to compliance with
federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noise emission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise
control system warranty is given in your warranty booklet.
Insulation:
• Removal of the noise shields or any underhood
insulation.
Engine:
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
• Removal or rendering engine speed governor, if the
vehicle has one, inoperative so as to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
can mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs to be
adjusted.
Fan and Drive:
• Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one, or
rendering clutch inoperative.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps
as described.
• Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one.
Air Intake:
• Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
• Modification of the air cleaner.
The vehicle should:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
Exhaust:
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
• Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
• Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe
clamps.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
• Have tires properly inflated.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim of
the headlamps can be affected and adjustment can be
necessary.
• Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
for more information.
4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause
excessive heat build-up which may cause damage to
the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted
to be seen on the flat surface.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx®
socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement
To replace one of these bulbs:
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
for more information.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
2. If you are replacing the bulb on the passenger side
remove the Engine Air Cleaner cover. See Engine
information.
Halogen Bulbs
3. Reach in and access the bulb sockets from inside
the engine compartment.
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly and pull it straight out.
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly.
5. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb by
releasing the clips on the bulb socket.
6. Replace it with a new bulb socket.
7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb
socket.
8. Reinstall the new bulb socket into the headlamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to secure.
9. Close the hood.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pickup Box Identification and
Fender Marker Lamps
To replace a pickup box identification or fender marker
lamp bulb:
1. Press the tab from the back to remove the lamp.
2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness.
3. Gently pry the individual lamp from the lamp
assembly.
4. Unplug the lamp.
A. Cargo Lamp
B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb (CHMSL)
5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into the assembly.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the bulbs by turning socket
counterclockwise and pulling the bulb straight out.
3. Install the bulbs by pushing the bulb straight in and
turning clockwise.
4. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
information.
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate latch
strikerpost and pull out
the lamp assembly.
Dually Models
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
4. Press the tab, if the vehicle has one, and turn the
bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the
taillamp assembly.
3. Determine which of the following taillamp
assemblies applies to your vehicle.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)
All Other Models
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/
Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-up Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/
Turn Signal Lamp
A. Backup Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the four screws.
2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly.
3. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and pull the it
straight out from the socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp assembly.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
4. Install a new bulb into the socket, turn it clockwise,
and press it in until it is tight.
5. Reinstall the lens and the four screws.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License Plate Lamp
Replacement Bulbs
To replace one of these bulbs:
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
3047
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket.
Back-up Lamp*
1156
Cargo Lamp and Center
High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
912
Fender Marker Lamp
High-Beam Headlamp
Low-Beam Headlamp
License Plate Lamp
W5WLL
9005
H11
168
Sidemarker Lamp/Stoplamp/
Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
Stoplamp/Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp*
3047
1157
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb socket out of the connector.
* Chassis Cab Models
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb
socket.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here is how to remove
the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the
blade and turn the blade assembly away from the
arm connector.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20-Inch Tires
{ CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch P275/55R20
size tires, they are classified as touring tires and are
designed for on road use. The low-profile, wide
tread design is not recommended for “off-road”
driving or commercial uses such as snow plowing.
additional information.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your vehicle’s tires are
page 5-73.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the tire illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high
as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size
means a light truck tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(F) Load Range : Load Range.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
(G) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire.
If two numbers are given as in the example,
120/116, then this represents the load index for
single versus dual wheel usage (single/dual). The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is
certified to carry a load.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-73.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-32.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using government
testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-83.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
tire, if your vehicle has one. See Spare Tire
on page 5-112 for additional information.
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they’re
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have a
crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the tire and loading information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add
air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Vehicles with P265/70R17 or P275/55R20 size tires
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the
vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set
the cold tire inflation pressure to 3 psi (20 kPa) above the
recommended cold tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Tire Operation
Tire Pressure Monitor System
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt
or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque and wheel nut tightening
page 5-93.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more evenly
and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically, see
{ CAUTION:
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badly
underinflated, the tire can overheat. An overheated
tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Be sure all tires (including
the spare) are properly inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
information on proper tire inflation.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
additional information.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC
Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-53
page 3-66.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS will illuminate the
low tire pressure warning
symbol located on the
instrument panel cluster.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any
time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or more
of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors
are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a
TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC
screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
If your vehicle does not have RKE, press the Driver
Information Center (DIC) vehicle information button
until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
message displays. The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
If your vehicle does not have RKE or DIC buttons,
press the trip odometer reset stem located on
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
the instrument panel cluster until the PRESS V TO
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays.
The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver
is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC screen.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and that the
TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see Dual
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has single rear wheels and the
tread design for the front tires is the same as the
rear tires, use the rotation pattern shown here
when rotating the tires.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread
design for the front tires is the same as the
rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation
patterns shown here when rotating the tires.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has dual
rear wheels and the
{ CAUTION:
tread design for the front
tires is different from the
dual rear tires, always
use the correct rotation
pattern shown here
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
when rotating the tires.
The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the inside
rear tires become the outside rear tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent
holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side
are lined up.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), reset the TPMS sensors after
rotating the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-32.
Make sure the spare tire, if your vehicle has one, is
stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or
turn the tire. If it moves, tighten the cable. See
page 5-108.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
indicators.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four (or six if
your vehicle has dual rear wheels). This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle
performing most like it did when the tires were new.
Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the
braking and handling performance of your vehicle. See
on proper tire rotation.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the
same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as
the original tires.
{ CAUTION:
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud and snow.
information.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires) the vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
on your vehicle’s wheels.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to
rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags,
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{ CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law. It should be
noted that the temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
If you need to replace any of the wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-129.
CAUTION: (Continued)
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust, or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels.
{ CAUTION:
If your vehicle has dual wheels or P265/65R18,
P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17 size tires, do not
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle does not have dual wheels
and has a tire size other than P265/65R18,
P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17, use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must. Use chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on
the tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the
tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{ CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by
driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
page 3-8.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of
the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in N (Neutral).
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Regular Cab
A. Wing Nut Retaining
Tool Kit
B. Tool Kit
D. Jack
Crew Cab
E. Jack Knob
F. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
A. Wing Nut Retaining
Tool Kit
D. Jack
E. Jack Knob
F. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
C. Wheel Blocks
B. Tool Kit
C. Wheel Blocks
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For regular cab models, the equipment you will need is
behind the passenger’s seat. For extended and crew
cab models, the equipment is on the shelf behind
the passenger’s side second row seat.
1. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to lower
the jack head to release the jack from its holder.
2. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. Remove the wing nut used to retain the storage
bag and tools by turning it counterclockwise.
You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
Extended Cab
A. Wing Nut Retaining C. Wheel Blocks
Tool Kit
D. Jack
B. Tool Kit
E. Jack Knob
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and
use the ignition key to remove the spare tire
lock (J). To remove the spare tire lock, insert the
ignition key turn and pull straight out.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack
handle extensions (I) as shown.
A. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock
(If equipped)
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Insert the hoist end
(open end) (F) of the
extension through
the hole (G) in the rear
bumper.
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
Do not use the chiseled
end of the wheel
wrench.
5. Use the wheel wrench
hook which allows you
to pull the hoist cable
towards you to assist in
reaching the spare tire.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension (F) connects
to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of
the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin,
tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of
the wheel along with the cable and guide latch.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the
cable to access the tire/wheel retainer. Separate the
retainer from the guide pin by sliding the retainer up
the pin while pressing down on the latch.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If your vehicle has
wheel nut caps, loosen
them by turning the
wheel wrench
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
counterclockwise.
If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut caps,
the wheel nut caps are designed to stay with the
center cap after they are loosened. Remove the
entire center cap.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the wheel has a smooth center cap, place the
chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on
the wheel, and gently pry it out.
3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it counterclockwise
to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel
nuts yet.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Position - 1500
Models
Front Position - All
Other Models
Rear Position – 1500
Models
Rear Position – All
Other Models
If the flat tire is on the rear, for 1500 models position
the jack under the rear axle about 2 inches (5 cm)
inboard of the shock absorber bracket; for all other
models, position the jack under the rear axle
between the spring anchor and the shock absorber
bracket.
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. If the
flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (1500 Model
vehicles), position the jack under the bracket
attached to the vehicle’s frame, behind the flat tire.
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (all other
models), position the jack on the frame behind the
flat tire.
If you have added a snow plow to the front of your
vehicle, lower the snow plow fully before raising
the vehicle.
Make sure that the jack head is positioned so that the
rear axle is resting securely between the grooves that
are on the jack head.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit
under the wheel well.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Install the spare tire.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel.
10. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel
is held against the hub.
11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
operation. Replace any wheel if its stud holes
have become larger or distorted in any way.
Inspect hubs and hub-piloted wheels for damage.
Because of loose running wheels, piloting pad
damage may occur and require replacement of the
entire hub, for proper centering of the wheels.
When replacing studs, hubs, wheel nuts or
wheels, be sure to use GM original equipment
parts.
If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If all
the studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could come
off and cause a crash. If any stud is damaged
because of a loose-running wheel, it could be that
all of the studs are damaged. To be sure, replace all
studs on the wheel. If the stud holes in a wheel
have become larger, the wheel could collapse in
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
page 5-129 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
12. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
Have a technician check the wheel nut tightness of all
wheels with a torque wrench after the first 100 miles
(160 km) and then 1,000 miles (1600 km) after that.
Repeat this service whenever you have a tire removed or
page 5-129 for more information.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall either the center cap, or bolt-on hub cap,
depending on what your vehicle is equipped with. For
center caps, place the cap on the wheel and tap it into
place until it seats flush with the wheel. The cap only
goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab on the center
cap with the indentation on the wheel. For bolt-on hub
caps, align the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and
then tighten by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to
tighten.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
page 5-129 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible proceed
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
page 5-108.
to Step 6.
{ CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks
or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the spare
tire lowers to the ground, continue with Step 5 of
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench
to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under
the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest
of the way.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
14. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been inspected and/or
replaced.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the
cable.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
A. Flat or Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer J. Spare Tire Lock
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
(If Equipped)
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)
together, as shown.
2. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (D) from the
guide pin. Pull the pin through the center of
the wheel. Tilt the retainer down and through the
center wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Insert the hoist end (F)
through the hole (G) in
the rear bumper and
onto the hoist shaft.
Do not use the chiseled
end of the wheel wrench.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You
cannot overtighten the cable.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, if the vehicle has one.
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the jack and jack tools:
1. Put the tools (D) in the tool bag (E) and place them
in the retaining bracket (C).
2. Tighten down the wing nut (C).
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B) and jack (G)
together with the wing nut (A) and retaining bolt (H).
4. Position the jack (G) in the mounting bracket (F).
Position the holes in the base of the jack (G) onto
the pin in the mounting bracket (F).
5. Return them to their original location in the vehicle.
For more information, refer to Removing the Spare
A. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut Retaining
Tool Kit
E. Tool Bag
F. Jack Mounting
Bracket
G. Jack
H. Bolt Retaining Wheel
Blocks
D. Wheel Wrench and
Extensions
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the
road tires originally installed on your vehicle. This spare
tire was developed for use on your vehicle, so it is all right
to drive on it. If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed, keep the vehicle in
two-wheel drive.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation
information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install or
store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle, do
not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have your
flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You could damage
the vehicle, and the repair costs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never use four-wheel drive
when the different size spare tire is installed on the
vehicle.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together. If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
match your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size
and type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass
and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger.
When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s upholstery
and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
Fabric/Carpet
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be
covered by the warranty.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup
of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or
damaged.
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
they could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Sheet Metal Damage
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive
a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is very
helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label has the
following information:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from
outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
the vehicle’s engine code.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
5-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool
down period, protecting the circuit until the problem
is fixed or goes away.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block access door is
located on the driver side
edge of the instrument
panel.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
5-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
6
7
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
Passenger Door Module, Driver
Unlock
8
9
10
11
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
Stoplamp
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Rear Climate Controls
Power Mirror
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat Entertainment
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,
Power Liftgate
The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown.
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
Rear Seats
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
20
21
22
23
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Rear Wiper
Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn
Signal
5
5-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top View
Fuses
Usage
24
Cooled Seats
Driver Seat Module, Remote
Keyless Entry System
Driver Power Door Lock (Unlock
Feature)
25
26
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Driver Side Power Window Circuit
Breaker
LT DR
Harness
Connector
Usage
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Driver Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
Harness Connector
Harness
Connector
Usage
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
BODY 2
BODY 1
BODY 3
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
Body Harness Connector 3
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
5-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
Harness
Usage
Connector
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Special Equipment Option Upfitter
Harness Connector
SEO/UPFITTER
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle.
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
Rear Sliding Window
Lift the cover to access the fuse block.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
5-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Engine Control Module, Throttle
Control
5
6
7
Trailer Brake Controller
Front Washer
8
Oxygen Sensor
9
Antilock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
10
11
12
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Right Side)
13
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Fuel Pump
Fuel System Control Module
Not Used
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Engine Controls
3
4
5-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
23
Not Used
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Left Side)
Trailer Park Lamps
Driver Side Park Lamps
Passenger Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise
Control
Not Used
Airbag System (Battery)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Take-Off
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition)
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
Rear Defogger
Heated Mirrors
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
SEO Upfitter Usage
Climate Controls (Ignition)
43
24
44
45
46
47
48
25
26
27
28
29
Horn
49
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lights 2
Sunroof
30
50
51
52
31
32
33
34
53
54
55
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
System
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Windshield Wiper
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
56
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Climate Controls (Battery)
Airbag System (Ignition)
Amplifier
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Not Used
57
58
59
Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System
Audio System
5-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
FAN HI
FAN LO
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
Cooling Fan Control
Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Cooling Fan 2
Antilock Brake System 1
Starter
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
Not Used
Heated Windshield Washer System
Transfer Case
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery
Power) (Optional - 40A Fuse
Required)
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
PWR/TRN
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
68
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
RUN/CRANK Switched Power
69
70
71
72
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
Climate Control Blower
Not Used
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
5-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
4.3L V6 1500 Series
4.8L V8 1500 Series
5.3L V8 1500 Series
6.0L V8 1500 Series
6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series
6.2L V8 1500 Series
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6
16.5 qt
16.9 qt
16.9 qt
16.8 qt
16.4 qt
17.6 qt
15.6 L
16.0 L
16.0 L
15.9 L
15.5 L
16.7 L
4.5 qt
6.0 qt
4.3 L
5.7 L
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8
5-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
1500 Series Standard and Short Box
1500 Series Long Box
2500 Series Standard Box
2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box
3500 Series Chassis Cab
3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank
26.0 gal
34.0 gal
26.0 gal
34.0 gal
50.0 gal
27.0 gal
23.0 gal
98.0 L
128.7 L
98.0 L
128.7 L
189.0 L
102.0 L
87.0 L
3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped)
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
Auto 4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic
Transmission
5.0 qt
4.7 L
Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E
Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E
Auto 6-Speed Transmission Allison
Transfer Case Fluid
6.0 qt
6.3 qt
7.4 qt
5.7 L
6.0 L
7.0 L
1.6 qt
1.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 ft lb
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
4.3L V6
4.8L V8
X
C
Automatic
Automatic
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™
(Iron Block)
0
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel
with Active Fuel Management™
(Aluminum Block)
3
J
Automatic
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 with Active Fuel
Management™ (Iron Block)
5.3L V8 with Active
Fuel Management™
(Aluminum Block)
M
K
Y
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block)
6.0L V8 with Active
Fuel Management™
(Aluminum Block)
6.2L V8 Flexible Fuel
(Aluminum Block)
2
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep this vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Introduction
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX
Diesel manual.
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from the vehicle. To help protect the
environment, and to keep the vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
information.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times
a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it
to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
{ CAUTION:
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
on page 5-6.
To purchase service information, see Service
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be checked, when to check it, and what
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good
condition.
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-17. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that the first service be
Maintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,
and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message displays within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
displays, service is required for the vehicle. Have the
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
Allison Transmission® only: Replace external transmission filter at the first
maintenance service performed on the vehicle.
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-12.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Inspect shields, vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR above 10,000 lbs
(4 536 kg) only. See footnote (n).
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the
maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
page 5-19.
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Four-wheel drive only: Change transfer
case fluid (extreme duty service). See
footnotes (g) and (l).
•
•
•
•
•
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Four-wheel drive only: Change transfer
case fluid (severe service). See
footnotes (g) and (m).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Four-wheel drive only: Change transfer
case fluid (normal service). See
footnote (g).
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnotes † and (k).
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (q).
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
Maintenance Footnotes
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts
as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure
test of the cooling system and pressure cap and
cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning
condenser is recommended at least once a year.
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-118 for more information.
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints on
2500/3500 series vehicles require lubrication but should
not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F
(−12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged. Control arm
ball joints on 1500 series vehicles are maintenance-free.
Vehicles used under severe commercial operating
conditions require lubrication on a regular basis every
3,000 miles (5 000 km).
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door hinges,
hood latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring
anchor, release pawl, tailgate hinges, tailgate linkage,
tailgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door
hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose
is unobstructed, clear, and free of debris. During any
maintenance, if a power washer is used to clean
mud and dirt from the underbody, care should be taken
to not directly spray the transfer case output seals.
High pressure water can overcome the seals and
contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the transfer case and should
be replaced.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check
that the purge valve, if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed.
(l) Extreme Duty Service: Change transfer case fluid if
the vehicle is mainly driven off-road in four-wheel
drive. Vehicles used for farming, mining, forestry,
Department of Natural Resources (DNR), and snow
plowing occupations meet this definition.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is
over 8600 lbs or if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
(m) Severe Duty Service: Change transfer case fluid if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Frequent trailer towing.
− Taxi, police, or delivery service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(n) Vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR above
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only: Inspect shields for damage or
looseness. Adjust or replace as required. This is a
Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable to vehicles
sold in the United States and recommended for
vehicles sold in Canada.
At the First 100, 1,000 and
6,000 Miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km)
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel nut
torque. For proper torque, see Capacities and
(p) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter or change indicator (if equipped) at each engine
oil change.
At Each Fuel Fill
(q) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Owner Checks and Services
Engine Oil Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-29.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
{ CAUTION:
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
page 5-73. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-80.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
on page 2-50.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
{ CAUTION:
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by
the regular brake.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Power Steering
System
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2
Category LB or GC-LB.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Floor Shift
Linkage
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
page 5-15.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Engine Oil
Front Axle
(1500 Series) -
Four-Wheel
Drive
Front Axle
(1500,
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021671, in
Canada 89021672).
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-29.
Engine Coolant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in
Canada 89021320).
2500 HD, and (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
Hydraulic Brake
System
3500 HD
Series)
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
(Four-Wheel
Drive)
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
One-Piece
Propshaft
Spline
Tailgate Hinge Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
and Linkage, (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Folding Seats, Canada 10953474).
and Fuel Door
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Hinge
Tailgate Handle
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
Pivot Points, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinges, Latch (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Bolt, and
Linkage
Canada 10953474).
(Two-Wheel
Drive with
4-Speed
GM 9985830.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Auto. Trans.)
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Chassis Lubricant
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
Synthetic Grease
Weatherstrip with Teflon, Superlube
Squeaks
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Standard Filter
High Capacity Filter
Oil Filter
15908916*
15908915
A3086C*
A3085C
4.3L V6
25010792
89017524
PF47
PF48
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6
12607234
12609877
25877402
41-993
41-985
—
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8
Wiper Blades – 21.6 in (55.0 cm)
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-11 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after
following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if
equipped, must be in good condition and properly
inflated. It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair
or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by
the warranty.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow
three weeks for delivery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor
for repairs not covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation Program
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and
hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Additional Program Information
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer/retailer, or General
Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or
write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
Service Manuals
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a
situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your dealer/
retailer technician service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-53
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-21
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights (cont.)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-18
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
S
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-36
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|